JP2019213983A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably enhancing game amusement.SOLUTION: First holding information is acquired on the basis of winning to a first operation port and second holding information is acquired on the basis of winning to a second operation port. When the first holding information is held and stored, the game round is executed in a first special pattern display section, and when second holding information is held and stored, the game round is executed in a second special pattern display section. In this case, when the continuous number of times of the remaining game rounds in a high probability state is larger than branch reference number of times, a special performance occurs only when the second holding information corresponding to a 16R big winning result is acquired. On the other hand, when the continuous number of times of the remaining game rounds in the high probability state is the branch reference number of times or less, a special performance occurs not only in the case where the second holding information corresponding to the 16R big winning result is acquired, but in the case where the second holding information corresponding to an 8R big winning result is acquired.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 6

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  For the pachinko machine, specifically, a configuration in which a special game state is entered when a winning result is obtained by an internal lottery based on a game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, or a predetermined ball entry A configuration is known in which a special game state is entered when a game ball enters the club. And when it shifts to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problem, the invention according to claim 1 enables a predetermined effect to be executed when the first benefit is provided in the first situation, and when the first benefit is not provided in the first situation. Is a first effect execution means for preventing the predetermined effect from being executed,
In the second situation, the second effect execution means for enabling the predetermined effect to be executed in both the case where the first profit is provided and the case where the second profit is provided,
It is characterized by having.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, it becomes possible to aim at the entertainment improvement of a game suitably.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the effect for game rounds is performed by a symbol display device in a normal game state. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the effect for game rounds is performed by a symbol display device in a high probability state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special figure special electric power control processing in a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric power control processing in a main side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the 1st hold information in the main side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the 2nd hold information in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification processing of the variable display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process in the sound light side MPU. 9 is a flowchart illustrating a V interrupt process in a display MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure determination process in the main side MPU. (A)-(g) Game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to adjust a continuation period. (A)-(f) It is a time chart for demonstrating a mode that a low probability big hit result is invalidated. (A)-(g) The number of game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to adjust a continuation period. (A)-(f) It is a time chart for demonstrating a mode that a low probability big hit result is invalidated. (A)-(g) Game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to adjust a continuation period. (A)-(f) It is a time chart for demonstrating the mode that a high-accuracy big hit result is not invalidated. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process at the time of acquisition in a main side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a 1st special figure reservation area, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of the execution area for 1st special figure, (c) It is explanatory drawing. It is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the figure reservation area, and is an explanatory view for explaining the composition of the execution area for (d) 2nd special figure. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the front side hold | maintenance in a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing of the said hold | maintenance in a main side MPU. 13 is a flowchart illustrating a setting process at the time of acquisition executed by a main MPU in the second embodiment. It is a front view of a game board in a 3rd embodiment. (A) It is a longitudinal section of the 1st special ball-entering device in a non-accepting state, and (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the 1st special ball-inserting device in a receiving state. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the success / failure table in 4th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the setting aspect of the continuation period of a game time. (A)-(e) It is a time chart for demonstrating the mode that a game progresses in each of a normal game state and a high probability state. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st special figure special electric power control processing in a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd special figure special electric power control processing in a main side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the 1st hold information in the main side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the 2nd hold information in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the identification processing of the variable display period in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure determination process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start process in a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special power ending process in a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for small hits in a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the selection process of the hold command in a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the hold | maintenance command correspondence process in a display side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the frequency notification performed by a symbol display device, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the firing promotion notification performed by a symbol display device. . (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special power ending process in a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure determination process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process in the sound light side MPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the reading process of the effect lottery table in the sound light side MPU, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a 1st effect lottery table and a 2nd effect lottery table. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows the timing at which a special effect is performed. It is a front view of the game board in a 6th embodiment. (A)-(d) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a success / failure table. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure special electric power control process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the acquisition process of the hold information in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure fluctuation start process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure determination process in the main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric power start process in a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the special power ending process in a main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing of hold | maintenance notification in a main side MPU. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that suspension information is performed.

<First embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and may be configured such that the outer frame 11 is provided in the island facility of the game hall.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 arranged behind the inner frame 13. ing. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 17 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and the game area PA formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  The configuration of the game board 24 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism 27 (see FIG. 2) attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail.

  Incidentally, the game ball launching mechanism 27 includes a launch rail 27a extending toward the guide rail, a ball feeder 27b that supplies game balls stored in an upper plate 66a described later onto the launch rail 27a, and a launch rail 27a. And a solenoid 27c which is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail. When the firing operation device (or firing handle) 28 provided on the front door frame 14 is rotated, the solenoid 27c is driven and controlled, and a game ball is fired.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when balls enter the general winning opening 31, the special power winning device 32, the first operating opening 33, and the second operating opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, regarding the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first operating port 33 or when a ball enters the second operating port 34, three prize balls are paid out, When a ball is thrown into the general winning opening 31, payout of 10 prize balls is executed, and when a ball is thrown into the special electric winning device 32, payout of 15 prize balls is executed. .

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, and the second actuation port 34 may be configured as the first actuation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33. Further, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which both the number of winning balls when the ball enters the first operating port 33 and the number of winning balls when the ball enters the second operating port 34 are plural. Alternatively, the number of award balls when the ball enters the first operating port 33 may be one, and the number of award balls when the ball enters the second operating port 34 may be one. The configuration may be a certain configuration, and the configuration may be such that the number of award balls in each of them is one.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate.

  Here, the entering ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not limited to the mode of being discharged from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 24. Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is located on the upper side.

  The lower frame portion 36a, which is a portion below the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36, is provided with a stage portion 36b so as to extend in the horizontal direction above the first operation port 33. A left frame portion 36c, which is a left portion of the symbol display device 41 in the unit 36, has an entrance of a warp passage that enables a game ball flowing down the left region of the variable display unit 36 to be guided to the stage portion 36b. A portion 36d is formed. The horizontal central portion of the stage portion 36b is located vertically above the first operating port 33, and the central portion has a deriving portion 36e for deriving a game ball by its own weight below the stage portion 36b. Is formed. In this case, a game ball derived to the stage portion 36b and derived from a region other than the derivation portion 36e to a position below the stage portion 36b is difficult to enter the first operating port 33, but the derivation portion 36e The game ball drawn out of the stage portion 36b from below enters the first operating port 33 with a high probability.

  The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric utility 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 34a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal power 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball from the second working port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and a game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second working port 34.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the common utility 34 a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a normal display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided at the lower right corner, which is a region where game balls do not pass in the game region PA, is displayed. The part 38a displays the variation of the pattern. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 38a is finished, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The general map display unit 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the normal map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 38, a universal map hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by turning on the usual figure display unit 38b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 as a trigger. Then, the lottery result is clearly shown through a display effect in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  More specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a first special figure display section 37a and a second special figure display section 37b. In the first special figure display section 37a, a winning display in the first operating port 33 is used as a trigger to perform a lottery, thereby performing a variable display of a pattern or a predetermined display. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. Further, in the second special map display section 37b, the winning display in the second operating port 34 is used as a trigger to perform a lottery, thereby performing a variable display of the pattern or a predetermined display. Then, a result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. In addition, the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined mode, but it is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be constituted by another type of display device such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In addition, as a pattern displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a plurality of types of characters , Or a configuration in which a plurality of colors are displayed.

  In the special figure unit 37, a first special figure reservation display part 37c and a second special figure reservation display part 37d are provided at positions adjacent to the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. . The number of game balls winning in the first operation port 33 is reserved up to a maximum of four, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by lighting the first special figure reservation display part 37c. In addition, the number of game balls winning in the second operation port 34 is retained up to a maximum of four, and the retained number is displayed by turning on the second special figure reservation display part 37d.

  In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT, and may be a dot matrix display device. You may.

  In the symbol display device 41, when the variable display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed on the first special figure display unit 37a based on the winning in the first operation port 33, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol is displayed accordingly. In addition to the above, when the variation display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed on the second special figure display unit 37b based on the winning in the second operation port 34, the variation display or the predetermined display of the pattern is performed accordingly. . In addition, in the symbol display device 41, not only the display effect triggered by winning in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode to be described later, which shifts after winning. Is performed.

  Based on the winning of one of the operating ports 33, 34, the display is started on any of the special figure display units 37a, 37b and the symbol display device 41, and the game is performed until a predetermined result is displayed and ended. This corresponds to one time. In this pachinko machine 10, at least a part of the execution period of the game on the first special figure display unit 37a and at least a part of the execution period of the game on the second special figure display unit 37b can be overlapped. ing. In other words, even if the game turn is being executed on the first special figure display section 37a, the game turn on the second special figure display section 37b can be started, and the game turn is executed on the second special figure display section 37b. The game round in the first special figure display section 37a can be started even while the game is being performed.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a win / fail determination process is executed based on a winning in the operating ports 33 and 34, and when the determination result of the win / fail determination process becomes a winning result, the operation shifts to the open / close execution mode. In the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing control of the special power prize device 32 is executed, and when a prize is generated in the open special power prize device 32, the payout of the game ball is executed. Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, a predetermined number of round games are executed. A round game is a game that continues until one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined open continuation period elapses, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls wins in the special prize winning device 32. That is. In this case, the configuration in which the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled such that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds in a situation where the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player. In, the opening duration is set to 29 seconds and the upper limit is set to 10. Therefore, the open duration of the round game is set to a time longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, and the upper limit of the special prize winning device 32 in each round game is set. It can be expected that more game balls will win. In addition, the upper limit number of round games is the same as the fixed round number regardless of the type of the jackpot result that triggered the shift. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  There are a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode as the success / absence lottery mode of the success / failure determination process, so that the probability of a winning result in which a shift to the open / close execution mode occurs is relatively high or low. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the manner in which the general-purpose accessory 34a of the second operating port 34 is opened is different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, the frequency at which the general-purpose duty object 34a is opened per unit time when compared in a situation where the launch of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area PA Is set to be relatively high and low, and a high frequency support mode and a low frequency support mode are set. When the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode, the support mode is the low frequency support mode, and when the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Hereinafter, a gaming state that is a low-probability mode and a low-frequency support mode is called a normal gaming state, and a gaming state that is a high-probability mode and a high-frequency support mode is called a high-probability state.

  Both the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are provided in a lower area PA1 which is an area below the variable display unit 36 in the game area PA. Further, the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are unitized as working port devices in a state where the first working port 33 is vertically arranged such that the first working port 33 is above and the second working port 34 is below. Have been. In addition, the general-purpose part 34a of the second operating port 34 can be controlled to be opened in response to a prize in the through gate 35, but the through gate 35 is located in a left area of the variable display unit 36 in the gaming area PA. It is arranged in a certain left area PA2. The game balls flowing down the left area PA2 are guided to the lower area PA1, and the game balls guided to the lower area PA1 are guided to the area where the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34 are provided. Can be done. Therefore, when the firing operation is performed with the aim of winning the first operating port 33, not only a winning in the first operating port 33 can occur, but also a winning in the second operating port 34 can occur. When the firing operation is performed with the aim of winning the second operating port 34, not only the winning in the second operating port 34 can occur but also the winning in the first operating port 33 can occur.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the support mode is the low-frequency support mode as described above, so that it is difficult for the winning to the second operating port 34 to occur, and the first operating port is more than the second operating port 34. 33, a winning is more likely to occur. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the execution target of the game times is basically the first special figure display unit 37a, and if a prize is accidentally generated in the second operating port 34, the second special figure display unit 37b is displayed. It becomes the execution target of the game round.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the high probability state, the support mode is the high frequency support mode as described above, so that the winning in the second operating port 34 is likely to occur. In this case, in the high probability state, winning in the second operating port 34 is more likely to occur than in the first operating port 33. However, as described above, when the firing operation is performed with the aim of winning in the second operating port 34, a winning in the first operating port 33 may occur, and the guide is guided to the lead-out section 36e of the stage section 36b. Since the game ball wins in the first operating port 33 with a high probability, the winning in the first operating port 33 occurs at the same frequency as in the normal gaming state even in the high probability state. Therefore, in the high probability state, both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b are to be played at a predetermined frequency. Accordingly, in the high probability state, an event in which the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are likely to occur.

  In the mode corresponding to the pattern of the special figure display sections 37a and 37b which are the execution targets of the game, the effect for the game is executed on the symbol display device 41. The display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the effect for the game round is executed will be described.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 4A and 4B, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the case where the effect for the game round is executed in the normal game state will be described. 4 (a) and 4 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a state in which the effect for a game is executed on the symbol display device 41 in the normal game state.

  In the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B, the display surface of the symbol display device 41 basically displays a normal hold display area 42 and a decoration area 43. The normal hold display area 42 is set along the upper edge of the display surface of the symbol display device 41, and an area other than the normal hold display area 42 on the display surface is set as the decoration area 43. The decoration area 43 has a larger display area than the normal hold display area 42.

  An image for notifying the player of the number of pieces of hold information acquired by the main controller 71 based on winning in the first operation port 33 is displayed in the normal hold display area 42. The hold information is information that triggers execution of the hit / fail determination processing in the main control device 71, and is information that triggers execution of the game. The hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as first hold information) acquired upon winning the prize in the first operating port 33 is an opportunity to execute the game in the first special figure display unit 37a, and wins the second operating port 34. The hold information (hereinafter, also referred to as second hold information) acquired as an opportunity is an opportunity to execute a game round in the second special figure display unit 37b. Up to four pieces of the first hold information are held and stored, and up to four pieces of the second hold information are also held and stored. As described above, in the normal gaming state, winning in the first operating port 33 is easy to occur, whereas winning in the second operating port 34 is unlikely to occur. Therefore, an image for notifying the player of the number of the first reservation information is displayed in the decoration area 43, but an image for notifying the player of the number of the second reservation information is not displayed.

  More specifically, the display contents of the normal hold display area 42 display the hold images G1 in the normal hold display area 42 in a number corresponding to the number of the first hold information. That is, if the number of the first hold information stored and held is 0, the hold image G1 is not displayed in the normal hold display area 42. Further, if the number of the first hold information stored on hold is one, one hold image G1 is displayed. If the number of the first hold information stored on hold is two, the hold image G1 is two. If the number of the first hold information stored and stored is three, three hold images G1 are displayed. If the number of the first hold information stored and held is four, the hold image G1 is displayed. Are displayed four times. When a plurality of reserved images G1 are displayed, the plurality of reserved images G1 are displayed side by side so as to be at a constant interval. When the number of the first hold information stored and held increases, the hold image G1 is displayed so as to increase rightward, and the first hold information is triggered by the start of the game round and held and stored. When the number of pieces of the first reserved information is reduced, the reserved image G1 is displayed so as to decrease toward the left. In the case of FIG. 4A and FIG. 4B, the number of pieces of the first hold information stored and held is two, so that two hold images G1 (black circles) are displayed in the normal hold display area 42. Images) are displayed side by side.

  In the decoration area 43, a plurality of (specifically, three) common symbol images G2 to G4 are displayed, and a rendering character G5 is displayed behind the common symbol images G2 to G4. In detail about the display contents of the common symbol images G2 to G4, three cubic base symbol images G6 are displayed side by side, and a symbol G7 by a numeral is displayed on the front of each base symbol image G6. Then, the base symbol image G6 rotates in the vertical direction around a rotation axis extending in the horizontal direction so as to pass through the center of the base symbol image G6, and the symbol G7 displayed on the front of each base symbol image G6 with the rotation. Is changed. The symbols G7 are numbers from "1" to "9". In the normal gaming state, all the same symbols G7 are displayed when the winning result is obtained in the success / failure determination process executed with the first hold information as a trigger. In a state where the common symbol images G2 to G4 are stopped and rotated, and no winning result is obtained, the same symbol G7 is not displayed. In addition, when the winning result is obtained in the winning / rejection determination processing and a high-probability winning result described later is obtained, the same odd symbol G7 is displayed, and a low-probability winning result described later is displayed. Are in a state where the same even symbol G7 is displayed. In addition, when a reach effect indicating that the degree of expectation as a winning result is high is executed, in the situation where the same symbol G7 is stopped and displayed in the left common symbol image G2 and the right common symbol image G4, the central symbol is displayed. The reach fluctuation in which the rotation display of the common symbol image G3 is continued. If the result of the winning / rejecting determination process is a game time that is a winning result, the rotation display of the central common symbol image G3 is stopped in a state where the symbol G7 constituting the combination of the reach symbols is stopped and displayed, and If the result is a game time in which the result is a departure result, the rotation display of the central common symbol image G3 is stopped in a state where the symbol G7 different from the symbol G7 constituting the combination of the reach symbols is stopped and displayed. In the reach effect, the common symbol images G2 to G4 continue to be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the directing character G5 is displayed in a state where the common symbol images G2 to G4 are not displayed or reduced. The display effect used may be executed, and in addition to or instead of hiding or reducing the common symbol images G2 to G4, the symbol display device 42 is configured to hide the normal hold display area 42. The entire display surface 41 may be configured as the decoration area 43.

  In the normal gaming state, the normal display display area 42 and the decoration area 43 are displayed on the symbol display device 41 as described above, but a prize in the second operating port 34 is accidentally generated and the second When the game round is executed with the suspension information as an opportunity, an additional decoration area 44 is set in a part of the decoration area 43, and the symbol G7 is variably displayed in the additional decoration area 44. The display area of the additional decoration area 44 is set smaller than the display area of the area other than the additional decoration area 44 in the decoration area 43, and is displayed so as not to overlap with the common symbol images G2 to G4 and the effect character G5. Is done.

  A plurality of symbols G8 to G10 are displayed in the additional decoration area 44, and at the start of the game round, the symbols G8 to G10 are scroll-displayed in the vertical direction. The symbols G8 to G10 displayed in the additional decoration area 44 are displayed by reducing image data for displaying the symbols G7 of the common symbol images G2 to G4 to a predetermined size and using them. In the normal gaming state, when the winning result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process executed with the second hold information as an opportunity, scroll display of the symbols G8 to G10 is stopped in a state where all the same symbols G8 to G10 are displayed. When the winning result is not obtained, the same symbols G8 to G10 are not displayed when scroll display is stopped. Further, when the winning result is obtained in the winning / rejection determination processing and a high-probability jackpot result described later is obtained, all the same odd symbols G8 to G10 are displayed, and a low-probability jackpot result described later is obtained. In this case, all of the same symbols G8 to G10 are displayed. In addition, when a reach effect indicating that the degree of expectation as a winning result is high is executed, the scroll display of the central symbol G9 in a state where the same left symbol G8 and the right symbol G10 are stopped and displayed. Is reached, and reach fluctuation is performed. If the result of the success / failure determination process is a game time that is a winning result, the scroll display of the center symbol G9 is stopped in a state where the symbols G8 to G10 constituting the combination of the reach symbols are stopped and displayed. If the result is a game time that is a result of a deviation, the scroll display of the central symbol G9 is stopped in a state where the symbols G8 to G10 different from the symbols G8 to G10 constituting the combination of the reach symbols are stopped and displayed.

  In the situation where the game round triggered by the second hold information has not been executed as described above, by displaying only the normal hold display area 42 and the decoration area 43 without displaying the additional decoration area 44, It is possible to ensure a wide reserved display area 42 and a decorative area 43 for normal use. On the other hand, in the situation where the game round triggered by the second hold information is being executed, the additional decoration area 44 is displayed so as to inform that the game round triggered by the second hold information is being executed. Instead, it is possible to emphasize that the game round triggered by the second hold information has been started.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A and 5B, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 when the effect for the game round is executed in the high probability state will be described. FIG. 5A and FIG. 5B are explanatory diagrams for explaining a state in which an effect for a game is executed on the symbol display device 41 in the high probability state.

  In the high probability state, as shown in FIGS. 5A and 5B, the display surface of the symbol display device 41 has a first individual display area 45, a first reserved display area 46, and a second individual display area. The area 47, the second hold display area 48, and the decoration area 43 are displayed. The first individual display area 45, the first reserved display area 46, the second individual display area 47, and the second reserved display area 48 are set along the upper edge of the display surface of the symbol display device 41. The display areas of these display areas 45 to 48 are the same or substantially the same, the first individual display area 45 is set at the left corner, and the first reserved display area 46 is set to the right of it. The second reserved display area 48 is set to the right of the second display area 48, and the second individual display area 47 is set to the right corner. On the display surface of the symbol display device 41, areas other than the display areas 45 to 48 are set as the decoration area 43. The display area of the decorative area 43 is set wider than the display areas 45 to 48, and the display area of the decorative area 43 is set wider than the total display area of the display areas 45 to 48. ing.

  In the first individual display area 45, an image display corresponding to the situation where a game round triggered by the first hold information is executed is performed, and in the second individual display area 47, the second hold information is triggered. In the situation where the game round is being executed, an image display corresponding to the situation is performed. In detail about the contents of the image display, a plurality of symbols G11 to G13 are displayed in the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47, and at the start of the corresponding game round, the plurality of symbols G11 to G13 are displayed. G13 is scroll-displayed in the vertical direction. Note that the same image data is used for the symbols G11 to G13 displayed in the first individual display area 45 and the symbols G11 to G13 displayed in the second individual display area 47. Further, the symbols G11 to G13 displayed in the individual display areas 45 and 47 are displayed by reducing the image data for displaying the symbols G7 of the common symbol images G2 to G4 to a predetermined size and using them.

  If a winning result is obtained in the winning / failing determination process executed with the corresponding hold information as an opportunity, scroll display of the symbols G11 to G13 is stopped in a state where the same symbols G11 to G13 are displayed, and the winning result is obtained. Otherwise, when the scroll display is stopped, the same symbols G11 to G13 are not all displayed. Further, when the winning result is obtained in the winning / rejection determination processing and a high-probability jackpot result described later is obtained, the same odd symbols G11 to G13 are all displayed, and a low-probability jackpot result described later is obtained. In this case, all of the same symbols G11 to G13 are displayed. Further, when a reach effect indicating that the degree of expectation as a winning result is high is executed, the scroll display of the central symbol G12 is performed in a state where the same left symbol G11 and the right symbol G13 are stopped and displayed. Is reached, and reach fluctuation is performed. If the result of the winning / failing determination process is a game time that is a winning result, the scroll display of the central symbol G12 is stopped in a state where the symbols G11 to G13 constituting the combination of the reach symbols are stopped and displayed. If the result is a game time in which the result is a departure result, the scroll display of the central symbol G12 is stopped in a state where the symbols G11 to G13 different from the symbols G11 to G13 constituting the combination of the reach symbols are stopped and displayed.

  In the first hold display area 46, an image display for notifying the player of the number of the first hold information stored and stored is performed, and in the second hold display area 48, the number of the second hold information stored and held is displayed. Is displayed for notifying the player of. The contents of the image display are the same as the contents of the image display in the normal hold display area 42. Specifically, in the first hold display area 46, the number of holdings corresponding to the number of the first hold information stored and held is set. The image G1 is displayed, and in the second hold display area 48, the number of hold images G1 corresponding to the number of the second hold information stored and held is displayed.

  In the decoration area 43 in the high probability state, the effect character G5 is displayed in the same manner as in the normal gaming state. In the high probability state, the common symbol images G2 to G4 are displayed as shown in FIG. 5A until a reach effect is started in one of the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47. Never. On the other hand, in the high probability state, the reach effect is started in one of the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47 to display the common symbol images G2 to G4 as shown in FIG. Is started. In this case, the common symbol images G2 to G4 are displayed in a mode corresponding to the display mode of the symbols G11 to G13 displayed in the individual display areas 45 and 47 where the reach effect has started. That is, a predetermined combination of reach symbols is displayed in the individual display areas 45 and 47 where the reach effect has started, but the symbols constituting the combination of reach symbols also in the common symbol images G2 to G4. A combination of reach symbols by the same type of symbol G7 as G11 to G13 is displayed. Then, in the situation where the combination of the reach symbols is displayed, the rotation display in the central common symbol image G3 is executed. If the result of the winning / rejecting determination process is a game time that is a winning result, the rotation display of the central common symbol image G3 is stopped in a state where the symbol G7 constituting the combination of the reach symbols is stopped and displayed, and If the result is a game time in which the result is a departure result, the rotation display of the central common symbol image G3 is stopped in a state where the symbol G7 different from the symbol G7 constituting the combination of the reach symbols is stopped and displayed. In the reach effect, the common symbol images G2 to G4 continue to be displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the directing character G5 is displayed in a state where the common symbol images G2 to G4 are not displayed or reduced. The display effect used may be executed. In addition to or instead of hiding or reducing the common symbol images G2 to G4, the symbol display device 42 is configured to hide the normal hold display area 42. The entire display surface 41 may be configured as the decoration area 43.

  When a reach effect is started in one of the first individual display region 45 and the second individual display region 47 after the reach effect is started in the other, the decorative region 43 corresponds to the side where the reach effect was started first in the decoration region 43. Reach production is performed. In this case, even if the reach effect being executed in the decoration region 43 ends in the situation where the reach effect is continued in the other individual display regions 45 and 47 and the game round corresponding thereto ends, In the decoration area 43, the reach effect corresponding to the reach effect continued in the other individual display regions 45 and 47 is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from having difficulty in recognizing which of the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47 the execution target of the reach effect in the decoration area 43 is. Become. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the situation where the reach effect is continued in the other individual display regions 45 and 47, the reach effect executed in the decoration region 43 ends and a game corresponding to the reach effect is completed. When the round ends, a reach effect corresponding to the reach effect continued in the other individual display regions 45 and 47 in the decoration area 43 may be started.

  Returning to the description of the game board 24 (see FIG. 3), when the determination result of the winning / failing determination processing is a winning result, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode as described above. In the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing control of the special power winning device 32 is executed. The special electric prize winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and is switched to an open state in which a game ball can win when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state. In the opening / closing execution mode, a display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  The front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 in which the game board 24 having the above configuration is attached to the resin base 21. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area PA can be visually recognized from the front. The window 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and has a window panel 62 fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is formed to be colorless and transparent by glass, the present invention is not limited to this. The window panel 62 may be formed to be colorless and transparent by synthetic resin, and the game area PA is formed through the window panel 62 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. It may be formed colored and transparent as long as it is visible.

  A display light emitting section 64 is provided above the window 61. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 65 for outputting a sound effect or the like according to a game state is provided. Below the window 61, an upper bulging portion 66 and a lower bulging portion 67 bulging toward the near side are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 66a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 66, and a lower plate 67a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 67. The upper plate 66a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later, and guiding the game balls to the game ball firing mechanism 27 side while aligning them in a line. The lower plate 67a has a function of storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 66a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a main control device 71 for controlling a main game is mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24). The main control device 71 has a main control board housed in a board box. In addition, you may provide the trace structure for giving the trace means for leaving the trace of the opening to the board | substrate box, or leaving the trace of the open. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation, or an adhesive layer that remains on an adhesion target at the time of peeling is peeled off. A configuration is conceivable in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of what has been done is pasted so as to straddle the boundaries between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  The back pack unit 15 is installed so as to cover the back side of the inner frame 13 including the main control device 71. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 72 formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and a payout mechanism 73 and a control device collecting unit 74 are attached to the back pack 72.

  The payout mechanism unit 73 includes a tank 75 in which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a payout device 76 for paying out the game balls stored in the tank 75. The game balls paid out from the payout device 76 are discharged to the upper plate 66a or the lower plate 67a through a payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 76. The payout mechanism unit 73 is provided with a back pack substrate having a power switch for performing ON and OFF operations of the power source, for example, while supplying a main power of AC 24 volts.

  The control device assembly unit 74 generates and outputs a predetermined power required by a payout control device 77 having a function of controlling the payout device 76 and various control devices, and is accompanied by an operation of the launch operation device 28 by the player. And a power source / launch control device 78 for controlling the launch of the game ball. The payout control device 77 and the power supply / launch control device 78 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 77 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main control device 71 includes a main control board 81 that controls the main control of the game. The MPU 82 is mounted on the main control board 81. The MPU 82 includes a ROM 83 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 82, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. A certain RAM 84, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are built in. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 83 and the RAM 84 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 82, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to the MPUs of the control devices other than the main control device 71.

  The MPU 82 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 82 is connected to a power failure monitoring board 85 provided in the main control device 71 and to a payout control device 77. A power supply / emission control device 78 having a function of supplying operating power is connected to the power failure monitoring board 85, and power is supplied to the MPU 82 via the power failure monitoring board 85.

  Various sensors such as various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e are connected to the input side of the MPU 82. The various winning detection sensors 86a to 86e include a detection sensor 86a provided in the general winning opening 31, a detection sensor 86b provided in the special electric winning device 32, a detection sensor 86c provided in the first operation opening 33, and a second operation. A detection sensor 86d provided at the opening 34 and a detection sensor 86e provided at the through gate 35 are included. Based on the detection results of these various prize detection sensors 86a to 86e, the MPU 82 determines a prize for each of the prize-corresponding spheres. In the MPU 82, various lotteries are executed based on winning in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34.

  To the output side of the MPU 82, a power failure monitoring board 85, a payout control device 77, and a sound emission control device 91 are connected. For example, a prize ball command is output to the payout control device 77 based on the result of the prize determination for the prize-corresponding ball entry unit. Various commands such as a change command, a type command, and an opening command are output to the sound emission control device 91.

  On the output side of the MPU 82, a drive unit 32b for special power to open and close the opening / closing door 32a of the special power winning device 32, a drive unit for general power 34b to open and close the general purpose object 34a of the second operating port 34, The drawing unit 37 and the general drawing unit 38 are connected. The special figure unit 37 includes a first special figure display section 37a, a second special figure display section 37b, a first special figure reservation display section 37c, and a second special figure reservation display section 37d. Are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. Similarly, the general-purpose unit 38 is provided with a general-purpose display unit 38a and a general-purpose reserve display unit 38b, all of which are connected to the output side of the MPU 82. The main control board 81 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 82 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 82 controls the drive of the drive unit 32b for the special power so that the special power winning device 32 is opened and closed. In addition, in a case where the open state of the general electric part 34a is won, the MPU 82 controls the driving of the general electric drive unit 34b so that the general electric part 34a is opened and closed. Further, at the time of each game, display control of the special figure unit 37 is executed in the MPU 82. Further, in the case where the lottery result indicating whether or not to bring the general electric part 34a into the open state is specified, the MPU 82 executes the display control of the general figure unit 38.

  The power failure monitoring board 85 relays between the main control board 81 and the power supply / emission control device 78, and monitors a voltage of DC stable 24 volts which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 78. The payout control device 77 controls the payout of the prize balls and the loaned balls by the payout device 76 based on the prize ball command input from the MPU 82 of the main control device 71.

  The power supply / launch control device 78 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, it generates necessary operating power for the main controller 71, the payout controller 77, and the like, and supplies the generated operating power.

  Specifically, the power supply / emission control device 78 includes a power supply unit 78a during power-on and a power supply unit 78b during power cut-off. The power supply unit 78a during power-on is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply in a game hall or the like, and generates operating power and supplies the generated operating power in a situation where external power is supplied from the commercial power supply. It has a function to do. The power supply during power cut 78b is formed of a capacitor, and the power supplied from the power supply during power on 78a when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON (when power is supplied from an external power supply). Is charged. Further, in a power cutoff state (when the power supply from the external power supply is cut off) such as when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off or when a power failure occurs in the commercial power supply, the power is discharged from the power supply during power cutoff 78b and the main power is cut off. Backup power is supplied to the RAM 84 of the control device 71 and the RAM (not shown) of the payout control device 77. Therefore, even in this situation, the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control device 71 and the RAM of the payout control device 77 is not erased while the backup power is being supplied from the power supply unit during power cut 78b. Stored.

  Here, information on the current game state and the progress of the game is temporarily stored in the RAM 84 of the main control device 71, and information on the number of unpaid prize balls is temporarily stored in the RAM of the payout control device 77. Is done. In this case, backup power is supplied to these RAMs from the power supply during power cutoff 78b as described above, so that even if there is no power supply from the power supply during power supply 78a, the current game The state, the progress of the game, and the unpaid prize ball information can be stored and held for a predetermined period. On the other hand, no backup power is supplied to the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 from the power supply during power cut-off 78b. Therefore, the information stored in the RAM 95 of the sound emission control device 91 and the RAM 105 of the display control device 101 are not backed up, and are destroyed or lost when the power supply from the power-on during power-on unit 78a is stopped. Will be erased.

  The capacity of the power supply during power cut 78b is relatively large, and the information stored in the RAM 84 of the main control unit 71 before the power is cut off is retained for a predetermined period (for example, one or two days). You. The power supply unit 78b during power interruption is not limited to a capacitor, but may be a battery or a non-rechargeable battery.

  The power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with a power supply unit at the time of a power failure (not shown) that is different from the power supply unit 78 during a power failure. In the power supply / launch control device 78, even after the DC stable 24 volt power supply becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit discharges power from the power supply unit at the time of power outage, so that the power outage control unit 78 can perform a power outage process described below for a sufficient time. The output of 5 volts, which is a drive power supply for the control system, is maintained at a normal value. Thus, the main control device 71 and the like can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

  The power supply / emission control device 78 is provided with an emission control unit 78c in addition to the various power supply units 78a and 78b. A touch sensor 28a, a push sensor 28b, and a variable resistor 28c built in the firing operation device 28 are electrically connected to the firing control unit 78c.

  A capacitor is built in the touch sensor 28a, and when the player's hand contacts the outer surface of the operation handle and the capacitance of the capacitor changes, a predetermined electric signal corresponding to the detection of the operation of the handle is emitted to the emission control unit 78c. Output to By receiving the predetermined electric signal, the firing control unit 78c recognizes that the player's hand is in contact with the outer surface of the operation handle. Further, the firing control unit 78c grasps the presence or absence of the operation of the firing stop switch of the firing operation device 28 according to the electric signal received from the push sensor 28b, and operates the operation handle according to the electric signal received through the variable resistor 28c. Grasp the amount of rotation operation of.

  The launch control unit 78c transmits a condition satisfaction signal in a predetermined signal form to the MPU 82 of the main control device 71 when a predetermined launch condition of the game ball is satisfied. Specifically, the firing control unit 78c receives a signal indicating that the operation handle is being touched by the player from the touch sensor 28a, and a signal indicating that the firing stop switch is not manually operated by the player. Is transmitted from the push sensor 28b to the MPU 82, a HI level condition satisfaction signal (a signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is continuously transmitted to the MPU 82. If any of the above signals has not been received, a low level condition satisfaction signal (a signal not corresponding to the condition satisfaction) is transmitted to the MPU 82. However, the relationship between the LOW level and the HI level may be reversed. Further, as a condition for transmitting the condition satisfaction signal corresponding to the condition satisfaction, a condition that the ball lending device is connected to the pachinko machine 10 may be added in addition to the above condition.

  The MPU 82 receives the HI level condition satisfaction signal, and if it is possible to permit the firing of the game ball, the HI level firing permission signal (signal corresponding to the firing permission) is transmitted to the firing control unit 78c. Is transmitted continuously. Note that the MPU 82 transmits a LOW-level firing permission signal (a signal not corresponding to the firing permission) when the HI-level condition satisfaction signal is not received from the firing control unit 78c. The relationship between the level and the HI level may be reversed.

  When the game ball launching mechanism 27 is electrically connected and receives a HI level launch permission signal from the MPU 82, the launch control unit 78c periodically drives and controls the game ball launching mechanism 27. In this case, if the game balls are continuously supplied to the game ball firing mechanism 27, one game ball is fired in the game area PA in a specific firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds). You. In addition, since the firing intensity is adjusted based on the signal received from the variable resistor 28c at the time of this firing, the game ball is fired at an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle.

  The audio emission control device 91 includes an audio emission control board 92 on which an MPU 93 is mounted. The MPU 93 includes a ROM 94 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 93 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 94 is executed. A RAM 95, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. The MPU 93 controls the drive of the display light emitting section 64 and the speaker section 65 based on the command received from the main control device 71, and transmits the command to the display control device 101.

  The display control device 101 includes a display control board 102 on which an MPU 103 is mounted. The MPU 103 includes a ROM 104 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 103 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 104. A certain RAM 105, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are built in. The MPU 103 controls the symbol display device 41 based on the command received from the sound emission control device 91.

  Although not shown, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like are mounted on the display control board 102, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP intervenes in reading and writing data in the video RAM, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays the image data on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM holds bitmap image data of various display symbols, a color pallet table which is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM.

  In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 82, ROM 83, and RAM 84 of the main control device 71 are referred to as a main MPU 82, a main ROM 83, and a main RAM 84, and the MPU 93, ROM 94, and RAM 95 of the sound emission control device 91 are sound light. The MPU 93, the sound light ROM 94, and the sound light RAM 95 are referred to as the MPU 103, the ROM 104, and the RAM 105 of the display control device 101, respectively.

<Electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 82 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main MPU 82 uses various types of counter information during the game, and determines the winning occurrence lottery, the setting of the display of the first special figure display unit 37a, the setting of the display of the second special figure display unit 37b, and the setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. The setting of the display of the ordinary figure display unit 38a is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the winning occurrence and the winning random number counter C1 are used. Big hit type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3 used for reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 comes off and fluctuates, and a random number initial value counter CINI used for setting an initial value of the random number counter C1. A change type counter CS for determining a change display period in the display units 37a and 37b and the symbol display device 41 is used. Further, a general-purpose random number counter C4 used for a lottery to determine whether or not to set the general-purpose part 34a of the second operating port 34 to the electric-purpose open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 121 of the main RAM 84.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the special figure reservation provided in the main RAM 84 when a prize occurs in the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34. Stored in area 122. The special figure reservation area 122 includes a first special figure reservation area 125, a second special figure reservation area 126, and a special figure execution area 127.

  The first special map reservation area 125 includes a first area 125a, a second area 125b, a third area 125c, and a fourth area 125d. According to the winning history of the first operation port 33, a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any one of the areas 125a to 125d as first suspension information. In this case, the first area 125a → the second area 125b → the third area 125c → the first area 125a to the fourth area 125d, when a winning in the first operating port 33 occurs plural times consecutively. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 125d. Since the four areas 125a to 125d are provided in this manner, up to four winning histories of game balls to the first operating port 33 are held and stored. Note that the number that can be held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another number such as two, three or five or more. , May be singular.

  The second special map reservation area 126 includes a first area 126a, a second area 126b, a third area 126c, and a fourth area 126d. According to the winning history of the second operation port 34, a winning random number counter C1, Each numerical information of the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any of the areas 126a to 126d as the second hold information. In this case, the first area 126a → the second area 126b → the third area 126c → the first area 126a to the fourth area 126d, when a winning in the second operating port 34 occurs plural times consecutively. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the four areas 126d. By providing the four areas 126a to 126d in this manner, up to four winning histories of gaming balls to the second operating port 34 are held and stored. It should be noted that the number that can be held in the second special figure holding area 126 is not limited to four and is arbitrary, and may be another number such as two, three, five or more. , May be singular.

  The execution area 127 for the special figure includes an execution area 127a for the first special figure and an execution area 127b for the second special figure. The execution area 127a for the first special figure stores the first hold information for performing the determination of whether the special figure is correct or not, the distribution, etc. when the variable display is started on the first special figure display unit 37a. Area. The second special map execution area 127b stores the second hold information of the target for performing the special figure pass / fail judgment or the distribution judgment when starting the variable display on the second special figure display unit 37b. Area. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special figure display unit 37a is started, the first reservation information stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure reservation area 125 is used as the execution for the first special figure. Moved to area 127a. On the other hand, when the variable display of the second special figure display unit 37b is started, the second reservation information stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure reservation area 126 is stored in the execution area 127b for the second special figure. Be moved.

  The information corresponding to the general-purpose random number counter C4 is stored in the general-purpose reservation area 123 when a prize occurs in the through gate 35. The general-purpose reservation area 123 includes a first area 128a, a second area 128b, a third area 128c, and a fourth area 128d. The numerical information of the general-purpose random number counter C4 is adjusted in accordance with the winning history of the through gate 35. Is stored in any of the areas 128a to 128d as the hold information on the general-purpose side. In this case, the first area 128a, the second area 128b, the third area 128c, and the fourth area are provided in the first area 128a to the fourth area 128d when a winning in the through gate 35 occurs continuously plural times. Numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of 128d. By providing the four areas 128a to 128d in this manner, up to four winning histories of gaming balls to the through gate 35 are stored on hold. It should be noted that the number of items that can be held and stored in the ordinary figure holding area 123 is not limited to four, but may be any number, and may be another number such as two, three, or five or more. It may be.

  An execution area 129 for ordinary drawing is provided in the ordinary drawing holding area 128. The execution area 129 for general drawing is an area in which the holding information of the target for which the validity determination for support is to be performed when the variable display is started on the general drawing display unit 38a. Specifically, when starting the variable display of the general-figure display unit 38a, the hold information stored in the first area 128a of the general-figure hold area 123 is moved to the general-figure execution area 129.

  Each of the counters will be described in detail.

  First, the general-purpose random number counter C4 will be described. For example, the ordinary random number counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in the range of “0” to “250” and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The general-purpose random number counter C4 is updated periodically and stored in the general-purpose holding area 123 of the main RAM 84 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed based on the stored value of the general-purpose random number counter C4 to determine whether to control the general-purpose part 34a to the open state.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of types of support modes are set so that the modes of support by the general purpose duty object 34a are different from each other. In detail, in the support mode, when compared in a situation where the launching of the game ball is continued in the same manner with respect to the game area, the general electric appliance 34a of the second operating port 34 per unit time The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the open state is relatively high and low.

  In the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning in the normal power open state in the general power open lottery process using the general random number counter C4 is the same (for example, both are 4/5). In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the general-purpose role object 34a is opened when the general-purpose open state is elected is set to be larger than in the low-frequency support mode, and one open time is set longer. ing. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the open state of the public power supply is selected and the open state of the general electric utility 34a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state. The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, a minimum securing time (that is, a normal time) after the first general-purpose open lottery is performed and then the next general-purpose open lottery is performed than in the low-frequency support mode. The duration of one display on the display unit 38a) is set short (specifically, 2 seconds in the high frequency support mode and 10 seconds in the low frequency support mode).

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a winning in the second operating port 34 will occur is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 is increased.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the normal power open state per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above, for example, in the general power open lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in an open state of a public train. In addition, a reserved time (for example, executed in the general map display unit 38a based on a winning to the through gate 35) is secured after the next public train opening lottery is performed. In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. Also good. Further, increasing the number of times of opening, lengthening the opening time, shortening the securing time that is secured after one general-purpose opening lottery is performed after one general-purpose opening lottery is performed, the securing time, By shortening the average time and increasing the probability of winning, one of the conditions or an arbitrary combination of conditions may be applied to increase the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode.

  When the public power open lottery using the general power random number counter C4 is won, the public power open state is entered. The general electric power release state ends when a predetermined number of times of opening and closing of the general electric role object 34a has been performed, or when a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have won the second operating port 34. I do. Specifically, the above upper limit number is 10 in both the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, the number of times of opening / closing the general purpose duty object 34a is one in the case of the low frequency support mode, whereas the number of times of opening / closing in the high frequency support mode is more than that in the case of the low frequency support mode. There are three times. In addition, one open continuation time of the general electric role product 34a is 1 second in the low frequency support mode, and 3 seconds in the high frequency support mode.

  Next, the winning random number counter C1 will be described. The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be added one by one in order within a range of, for example, “0” to “599” and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 of the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball has won the first operation port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second operation port 34. At the timing of winning, it is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 of the special figure reservation area 122. Then, the determination of success / failure is performed using the value of the stored random number counter C1.

  The value of the random number to be won at the time of the win / fail determination is stored in the main ROM 83 as a win / fail table. In the success / failure table, a jackpot result and a miss result are set as the success / failure results. The jackpot result is a success / failure result that can trigger the transition to the open / close execution mode in which the special prize winning device 32 is controlled to open / close, and can be a transition trigger for at least one of the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. The losing result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  As the success / failure table, a low-probability table and a high-probability table are provided. Two pieces of numerical information that result in a big hit are set in the low probability hit / fail table (for example, “5” and “305”), and 20 pieces of numerical information that result in a big hit are set in the high probability hit / failure table ( For example, "5", "34", "65", "130", "163", "192", "220", "245", "276", "305", "334", "365", " 392 "," 420 "," 470 "," 495 "," 520 "," 558 "," 575 "," 599 "). The success / failure lottery mode in which the low probability success / failure table is referred to in the success / failure determination processing is a low probability mode, and the success / failure lottery mode in which the high probability success / failure table is referred to in the success / failure determination processing is a high probability mode. In the low-probability mode (ie, the normal gaming state), when the hit / fail determination processing is performed on the first hold information acquired based on the winning in the first operating port 33, and when the winning in the second operating port 34 is performed. In any case where the appropriateness determination processing is performed on the second hold information acquired based on the information, the low probability appropriateness determination table is referred to. In the high-probability mode (that is, in the high-probability state), either the case where the success / failure determination process is performed on the first suspension information or the case where the success / failure determination process is performed on the second suspension information is performed. Also refers to the high-probability table. Also, all types of numerical information that result in the jackpot in the low probability table are included in the types of numerical information that result in the jackpot in the high probability table. Thereby, the hold information that results in the jackpot in the normal gaming state becomes the hold information that results in the jackpot even in the high probability state.

  If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than the low probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by one in order within the range of "0" to "29", and to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 of the special figure reservation area 122 at the timing when the game ball has won the first operation port 33, and the game ball is stored in the second operation port 34. At the timing of winning, it is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 of the special figure reservation area 122. Then, the distribution determination process is performed using the stored value of the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution destination of the type of the jackpot result to the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the main ROM 83 as a distribution table. In the distribution table, a low-probability jackpot result and a high-probability jackpot result are set as the types of jackpot results.

  The result of the low probability jackpot is a trigger for starting the open / close execution mode. Also, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, regardless of the win / loss lottery mode before the switching to the opening / closing execution mode, the jackpot result is a low probability mode, and the support mode before the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is low. This is a jackpot result in the frequency support mode. These low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode result in a high-accuracy jackpot and are continued until the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the result ends.

  The most advantageous jackpot result triggers the start of the open / close execution mode. Further, after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, regardless of the winning / rejecting lottery mode before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the jackpot result becomes the high probability mode, and the support mode before shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is high. It is a jackpot result that becomes the frequency support mode. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are the next jackpot results, and at least continue until the switching to the opening / closing execution mode is performed.

  In the distribution table, “0” to “14” of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0” to “29” correspond to the low-probability jackpot result, and “15” to “29” correspond to the high-probability jackpot result. Yes, it is. Regardless of whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode, the distribution determination process is further performed on the first suspension information and the distribution determination process is performed on the second suspension information. In either case, the same distribution table is referred to.

  Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of “0” to “238” and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. Here, the reach effect is set in the pachinko machine 10 as described above as a type of display effect on the symbol display device 41.

  The reach effect is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result in which the same symbol combination is finally stopped and displayed. Further, in the game time corresponding to an outcome result in which the same combination of symbols is not stopped and displayed, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the main ROM 83. Is executed when corresponds to the occurrence of the reach display.

  Next, the variation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by one, for example, in the range of “0” to “198” and return to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The fluctuation type counter CS is used in determining the fluctuation display period in the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b and the fluctuation display period of the symbol in the symbol display device 41 in the main MPU 82. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation pattern at the time of starting the variation display on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b and at the time of starting the symbol variation by the symbol display device 41. Is obtained.

<Regarding Various Processes Executed by Main MPU 82>
Next, each processing executed to advance the game in the main MPU 82 will be described. The processing of the main MPU 82 is roughly classified into a main processing started when the power is turned on, and a timer interrupt processing started periodically (in the present embodiment, at a period of 4 msec).

<Main processing>
First, the main processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the main process, first, a power-on wait process is executed (step S101). In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits for one second after the main process is started without proceeding to the next process. Thereafter, access to the main RAM 84 is permitted (step S102), and an internal function register of the main MPU 82 is set (step S103).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase button provided on the power / emission control device 78 is manually operated (step S104), and whether or not the power failure flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1". (Step S105). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum is executed (step S106), and it is determined whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined (step S106). S107).

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the game hall is opened, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase button. Therefore, if the RAM erase button has been pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the main RAM 84 is cleared as initialization of the main RAM 84. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase button has not been pressed, the process of step S109 is not performed without executing the process of step S108, provided that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to. In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the main RAM 84 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current game state ST1 to ST4 for recognizing the current game state ST1 to ST4. Is transmitted to the sound emission control device 91. Further, a payout initialization command indicating that the RAM of the payout control device 77 should be initialized is transmitted to the payout control device 77.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the main MPU 82 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt processing, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of the timer interrupt process (step S110). Further, a random number initial value updating process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed (step S111), and a variation counter updating process for updating the variation type counter CS is executed (step S112). In these updating processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the main RAM 84, a process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is performed, and then a process of overwriting the read counter is performed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt processing is permitted is performed (step S113). If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt processing is repeatedly started at a cycle of 4 msec.

  First, a power failure information storage process is executed (step S201). In the power failure information storage processing, it is monitored whether or not a power failure signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption has been received from the power failure monitoring board 85, and when the occurrence of a power failure is identified, a power failure processing is executed.

  Thereafter, a lottery random number update process is executed (step S202). In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary power random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, after executing the process of sequentially reading the current numerical information from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general power random number counter C4, and adding 1 to each of the read numerical information, A process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value.

  Thereafter, a random number initial value update process is executed as in step S111 (step S203), and a variation counter update process is executed as in step S112 (step S204). Thereafter, a game stop determination process is executed (step S205). In the game stop determination process, it is monitored whether or not the progress of the game is to be stopped. If the progress of the game is to be stopped, the execution of the process for progressing the game is stopped. Thereafter, on condition that the progress of the game is not stopped (step S206: NO), the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information is set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 32b and 34b is executed. For example, when the information to switch the special power winning device 32 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the special power driver 32b is started, and when the information to switch to the closed state is set. Stops the output of the drive signal. If the information to switch the general-purpose part 34a of the second operating port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the general-purpose driving unit 34b is started and the state is switched to the closed state. If the information is set, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit 34b for ordinary power is stopped.

  Thereafter, a reading process is executed (step S208). In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  Thereafter, a winning detection process is executed (step S209). In the prize detection process, the signals received from the respective prize detection sensors 86a to 86e are read, and the general prize port 31, the special power prize device 32, the first operation port 33, the second operation port 34, and the through gate 35 are read. A process for determining the presence or absence of a ball is executed.

  Thereafter, a timer update process for updating numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the main RAM 84 is executed (step S210). In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  Thereafter, a fraud detection process of monitoring whether a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is performed (step S211). In the fraud detection process, the occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, the setting for stopping the game is performed in step S205 in the next timer interrupt process, An affirmative determination is made in step S206.

  Thereafter, a launch control process for performing launch control of the game ball is executed (step S212). In the situation where the firing operation is continued on the firing operation device 28, as described above, one game ball is fired every 0.6 seconds so as to have a predetermined firing cycle.

  Thereafter, as an input state monitoring process, disconnection of each of the prize detection sensors 86a to 86e and confirmation of opening of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading process of step S208 (step). S213).

  Thereafter, a first special figure special power control process for performing execution control of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first hold information is executed (step S214). A second special figure special power control process is performed for performing the execution control of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b and the execution control of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second hold information (step S215). In addition, a general drawing control process for performing a support lottery of the general electric thing 34a and an opening / closing control of the general electric thing 34a is executed (step S216). More specifically, in the case of winning a prize in the through gate 35, the condition that the number of hold information of the general figure side stored in the general figure hold area 123 is less than four is set. Then, the value of the ordinary random number counter C4 at that time is stored in the ordinary figure holding area 123. Further, in the general-purpose electric power control process, the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 38a is not executed, and the general electric-power part 34a of the second operating port 34 is controlled to open and close in a predetermined manner. In a situation where the state is not in the open state, if the general-purpose holding information is stored in the general-purpose holding area 123, the general-purpose holding information stored in the first area 128a of the general-purpose holding area 123 is used. The program shifts to the execution area 129 for ordinary drawing. Then, the general-purpose opening lottery process is performed on the hold information on the general-purpose side, and the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display unit 38a is started. In this case, whether the support mode at that time is the low frequency support mode or the high frequency support mode is specified, and the variable display of the pattern is performed over the variable display period corresponding to the support mode corresponding to the specified result. The display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a is executed so as to be executed. In the case where the result of the general-purpose opening lottery process is a general-purpose open state winning, the variation display of the pattern on the general-purpose display section 38a is terminated in a state where the corresponding pattern is stopped, and the result of the general-purpose opening lottery process In the case where the icon is not in the open state of the ordinary power, the variation display of the pattern on the ordinary figure display section 38a is ended in a state where the pattern corresponding to the open state is stopped. In a case where the result of the general-purpose opening lottery processing indicates that the general-purpose opening state has been won, when the variation display of the picture on the general-purpose display section 38a ends, the state is shifted to the general-purpose opening state. In the normal power release state, it is specified whether the support mode in the case where the general power release state is started is one of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, and in a mode of the support mode corresponding to the specified result. Opening / closing control of the general purpose duty object 34a is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode, even if the immediately preceding support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the display control of the general-purpose display unit 38a and the general-purpose opening lottery process of the general-purpose accessory 34a are performed in a manner corresponding to the low-frequency support mode. And the opening / closing control of the general electric part 34a is executed.

  Thereafter, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 to S216, the setting of output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the first suspension information in the first special figure suspension display section 37c, and the increase / decrease number of the second suspension information The output information to be reflected in the second special figure suspension display section 37d and the output information to reflect the increase / decrease number of the reservation information on the general figure side to the general figure suspension display section 38b are set (step S217). . Further, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S214 to S216, output information for updating the display contents of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is set, and the general figure display is performed. The output information for updating the display content of the unit 38a is set (step S217).

  Thereafter, the contents of the command and the signal received from the payout control device 77 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed (step S218). Further, a payout output process for setting the prize ball command as an output target is executed (step S219). Further, an external information setting process for controlling the start and the end of the output of the external signal according to the processing result of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed (step S220).

  If a positive determination is made in step S206, or after the processes in steps S207 to S220 are performed, the timer interrupt process ends.

<First special figure special power control processing and second special figure special power control processing>
Next, the first special figure special power control process executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 10, and the steps of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) will be described. The second special figure special power control process executed in S215 will be described in detail with reference to the flowchart of FIG. It should be noted that the first special figure special power control processing and the second special figure special power control processing have similar processing configurations, and therefore, description will be given for each corresponding processing configuration.

  In the first special map special power control process, a process for acquiring the first hold information is executed when a winning in the first operating port 33 occurs, and when the first hold information is stored. A hit / fail judgment is performed on the first hold information, and a process for performing an effect for playing a game is executed upon the hit / fail judgment. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and when the opening / closing execution mode ends is executed.

  In the second special figure special power control process, a process for acquiring the second hold information is executed when the winning in the second operating port 34 occurs, and when the second hold information is stored. A determination is made as to the second hold information, and a process for performing an effect for playing a game is executed with the determination as to the trigger. In addition, based on the result of the determination, the processing for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode after the effect for playing the game is executed, and the processing during the opening / closing execution mode and when the opening / closing execution mode ends is executed.

  More specifically, in the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), first, processing for acquiring first reservation information is executed (step S301). In the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11), first, the processing of acquiring the second hold information is executed (step S401).

  In the process of acquiring the first hold information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12A, a prize has occurred in the first operating port 33 (step S <b> 501: YES). When the number of the stored first hold information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S502: YES), a process for acquiring the first hold information is executed. Note that the process of monitoring whether or not a prize has occurred in the first operation port 33 is performed in the prize detection process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The winning data corresponding to the winning device in which the winning is generated is set in the main RAM 84. In step S501, it is determined whether or not the winning data is set in the main RAM 84.

  In the process for acquiring the first hold information, first, the main MPU 82 provides the number of unprocessed first hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 in the main RAM 84. Then, the value of the first special figure suspension counter is incremented by 1 (step S503). Incidentally, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure suspension display section 37c corresponds to the number of the first suspension information stored in the first special figure suspension area 125.

  After that, the storage corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 125, that is, the number of reserved storages obtained by adding 1 in step S503, to each value of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is stored in the area (step S504). After that, the setting process at the time of acquisition is executed (step S505). Although details will be described later in the setting process at the time of acquisition, the process for adjusting the duration of the game times triggered by the other hold information already stored and held according to the content of the hold information acquired this time is described below. Execute.

  After that, a first hold command indicating that the first hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 (step S506). The sound-light-side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display-side MPU 103, so that the number of the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 is reduced. Is changed according to the increase in the number of holdings.

  In the process of acquiring the second reservation information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 12B, a prize has occurred in the second operating port 34 (step S601: YES), and furthermore, the second special figure reservation area 126 is displayed. When the number of stored second hold information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S602: YES), a process for acquiring the second hold information is executed. The process of monitoring whether or not a prize has occurred in the second operating port 34 is performed in the prize detection process (step S209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). The winning data corresponding to the winning device in which the winning is generated is set in the main RAM 84. In step S601, it is determined whether or not the winning data is set in the main RAM 84.

  In the process for acquiring the second reservation information, first, the main MPU 82 is provided in the main RAM 84 so that the number of the unprocessed second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 is grasped by the main MPU 82. The value of the second special figure hold counter is incremented by 1 (step S603). Incidentally, the display content of the second special figure holding display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure holding counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure suspension display section 37d corresponds to the number of pieces of second suspension information stored in the second special figure suspension area 126.

  After that, the storage corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 126, that is, the number of reserved storages obtained by adding 1 in step S603, to each value of the winning random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. It is stored in the area (step S604). Thereafter, the setting process at the time of acquisition is executed (step S605). Although details will be described later in the setting process at the time of acquisition, a process for adjusting the fluctuation display period of the game times triggered by the other hold information already stored and held in accordance with the content of the hold information acquired this time Execute

  After that, a second hold command indicating that the second hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 93 (step S606). The sound-light-side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second hold command to the display-side MPU 103, and thereby displays the number of the second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41 to increase the number of hold information. Let it be changed corresponding to.

  Returning to the description of the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10) and the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11), after executing the hold information acquisition processing (step S301 or step S401), the main ROM 83 The stored special figure special power address table is read (step S302, step S402). In the special figure special power address table, the start of a program for executing processing corresponding to the numerical information of the first special figure special power counter provided in the main RAM 84 and the second special figure special power counter provided in the main RAM 84 is started. Address is set.

  The first special figure special power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10) by the main MPU 82. The first special figure special power control process includes a process for controlling an effect for a game round and a process for controlling an open / close execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for the game round, a special figure variation start process (step S305), which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, and a process for controlling the effect for the game round. , A special figure changing process (step S306), and a special figure finalizing process (step S307), which is a process for terminating the game effect, are set. In addition, as processing for controlling the opening / closing execution mode, special power starting processing (step S308), which is processing for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and processing for controlling the open state of the special power winning device 32. The special power closing process (step S309), the special power closing device processing (step S310) for controlling the closed state of the special power winning device 32, the ending of the open / close execution mode, and the end of the open / close execution mode And a special power ending process (step S311), which is a process for controlling the transition of the gaming state. If the value of the first special figure special power counter is "0", the special figure variation start processing (step S305) is to be executed, and if the value of the first special figure special power counter is "1", the special figure special power counter is "1". When the value of the first special figure special power counter is "2", the special figure special determination processing (step S307) is to be performed, and the first special figure special power counter is executed. If the value is "3", the special power start process (step S308) is to be executed, and if the value of the first special figure special power counter is "4", the special power open process (step S309) is to be executed. When the value of the first special figure special power counter is "5", the special power closing processing (step S310) is executed, and when the value of the first special figure special power counter is "6", the special power is closed. End processing (step S311) It is executed.

  The second special figure special power counter is a counter for specifying the processing content to be executed in the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11) by the main MPU 82. Similar to the first special figure special power control processing, the second special figure special power control processing includes a processing for controlling an effect for a game round and a processing for controlling an open / close execution mode. In this case, as a process for controlling the effect for the game round, a special figure change start process (step S405), which is a process for starting the effect for the game round, and a process for causing the effect for the game round to proceed. , A special figure changing process (step S406), and a special figure finalizing process (step S407), which is a process for ending the game effect, are set. As a process for controlling the opening / closing execution mode, a special power starting process (step S408) for controlling the opening of the opening / closing execution mode, and a process for controlling the open state of the special power prize winning device 32. The special power opening process (step S409), the special power closing device processing (step S410) for controlling the closed state of the special power winning device 32, and the ending of the open / close execution mode and the end of the open / close execution mode And a special power ending process (step S411), which is a process for controlling the transition of the game state. When the value of the second special figure special power counter is "0", the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S405) is executed, and when the value of the second special figure special power counter is "1", the special figure special power counter is "1". When the value of the second special figure special power counter is "2", the special figure special processing (step S407) is the execution target, and the second special figure special power counter is executed. If the value is "3", the special power start process (step S408) is to be executed, and if the value of the second special figure special power counter is "4", the special power open process (step S409) is to be executed. When the value of the second special figure special power counter is "5", the special power closing processing (step S410) is executed, and when the value of the second special figure special power counter is "6", the special power is closed. End processing (step S411) It is executed.

  More specifically, in the special figure special power address table, “0” to “6” of each special figure special power counter correspond to the start addresses SA0 to SA6, respectively, and the start address SA0 corresponds to the special figure change start processing (step S305, The start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the step S405), the start address SA1 is the start address of the program for executing the special figure change processing (steps S306 and S406), and the start address SA2 is the fixed figure fixation. The start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the middle processing (steps S307 and S407), and the start address SA3 is the start address of the program for executing the special power start processing (steps S308 and S408). Is the special power open processing (step S309, The start address SA5 is the start address of the program for executing the special power closing process (steps S310, S410), and the start address SA6 is the special address end process. (Step S311, Step S411) This is the start address of the program for executing.

  In the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10) and the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11), after reading the special figure special power address table (step S302, step S402), the corresponding special figure special power counter is executed. The start address corresponding to the information is acquired from the special figure special telephone address table (step S303, step S403), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S304, step S404). Hereinafter, the special figure change start processing (steps S305 and S405), the special figure change processing (steps S306 and S406), the special figure determination processing (steps S307 and S407), and the special power start processing (steps S308 and S408) ), The special power opening process (steps S309 and S409), the special power closing process (steps S310 and S410), and the special power ending process (steps S311 and S411) will be individually described.

<Special map start processing>
First, the special figure change start processing in steps S305 and S405 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the special figure change start processing, first, it is determined whether or not the processing for the big hit state is executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special power control processing (FIGS. 10 and 11) (step S701). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, even if the game play is being executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game play can be executed on the other. In this case, step S701 is executed, and if the process for the big hit state is executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special power control process (FIGS. 10 and 11), the processes after step S702 are executed. The start of a new game round is regulated without any change. Thus, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is being executed in response to the game time in one of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b, the game time in the other is not newly started. Be regulated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the open / close execution mode. If this time is the special figure change start processing in the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), it is determined in step S701 whether or not the value of the second special figure special power counter is 3 or more, and 3 or more In this case, the processing after step S702 is not executed. If the current time is the special figure variation start processing in the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11), the value of the first special figure special power counter is 3 or more. Is determined in step S701, and if it is 3 or more, the processing after step S702 is not executed.

  When a negative determination is made in step S701, it is determined whether or not the corresponding suspended number is one or more (step S702). If this time is the special figure change start processing in the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of first reservation information are stored in the first special figure reservation area 125, and this time In the case of the special figure change start processing in the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of second reserved information are stored in the second special figure reserved area 126.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, a data setting process is executed (step S703). In the data setting process, if this time is the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure reservation area 125 is stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure. Moving. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 125 is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d to the lower area side. The data in the first area 125a is cleared and the second area 125b → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first area 125a, the third area 125c → the second area 125b, the fourth area 125d → the third area 125c, and so on. Thereafter, the value of the first special figure reservation counter of the main RAM 84 is decremented by one. As a result, the display content of the first special figure suspension display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first suspension information is reduced by one. In the data setting process, a first decrease command indicating that the first hold information in the first special figure holding area 125 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The sound-light-side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first decrease-time command to the display-side MPU 103, thereby displaying the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41. The display of the number is changed according to the decrease in the number of pending information.

  In the data setting process, if this time is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11), the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure reservation area 126 is stored in the second special figure execution area 127b. Moving. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 126 is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d to the lower area side. The data in the first area 126a is cleared and the second area 126b → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first area 126a, the third area 126c → the second area 126b, the fourth area 126d → the third area 126c, and so on. Thereafter, the value of the second special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is decremented by one. As a result, the display content of the second special figure suspension display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second suspension information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a second decrease command indicating that the second hold information in the second special figure holding area 126 has decreased by one is transmitted to the MPU 93 on the sound light side. The sound-light-side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second decrease command to the display-side MPU 103 to display the number of the second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41 as the hold information. Make changes to accommodate the decrease in numbers.

  After executing the data setting process, the game information is being executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric power control process (FIGS. 10 and 11), and the hold information which triggered the game time is the jackpot result. Is determined (step S704). In the main RAM 84, a first low-probability jackpot flag and a first high-probability jackpot flag corresponding to the first hold information are set, and a second low-probability jackpot flag and a second A high-accuracy jackpot flag is set. The first low-probability jackpot flag is set to “1” when it is determined that the first hold information corresponds to the low-probability jackpot result as a result of execution of the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination process. This flag is cleared to “0” when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first hold information ends. The first high-accuracy jackpot flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the first hold information corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result as a result of executing the hit / fail judgment processing and the distribution judgment processing on the first hold information. This flag is cleared to “0” when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the first hold information ends. The second low-probability jackpot flag is set to “1” when it is determined that the second hold information corresponds to the low-probability jackpot result as a result of the execution of the hit / fail determination process and the distribution determination process. This flag is cleared to “0” when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second hold information ends. The second high-accuracy jackpot flag is set to “1” when it is specified that the second hold information corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result as a result of executing the hit / fail judgment processing and the distribution judgment processing on the second hold information. This flag is cleared to “0” when the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the second hold information ends. In step S704, if this time is the special figure change start processing of the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), "1" is set to the second low-probability jackpot flag or the second high-probability jackpot flag of the main RAM 84. If the current time is the special figure variation start processing of the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11), "1" is set as the first low-precision big-hit flag or the first high-precision big-hit flag in the main RAM 84. Is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S704, a hit / fail determination process is executed (step S705). In the success / failure determination process, if the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, the low probability success / failure table is stored in the main ROM 83 regardless of whether the start of the game is the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. If the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high-accuracy winning / rejecting table is read from the main ROM 83 regardless of whether the game round start target is the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b. . After reading the hit / fail table, the hit / fail determination is performed based on the hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure which is the start target of the current game round. , That is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1, and it is determined whether the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the hit / fail table.

  If the result of the hit determination process is a jackpot result (step S706: YES), a distribution determination process is executed (step S707). In the distribution determination process, a common distribution table is read from the main ROM 83 irrespective of the current game state and the type of the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be started. Then, based on the hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special map and the execution area 127b for the second special map which is the start target of the current game round, the information for distribution determination, that is, the jackpot type By reading the numerical information obtained from the counter C2 and referring to the distribution table, it is specified which kind of the jackpot result the read numerical information corresponds to.

  After executing the distribution determination process, "1" is set to the flag in the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the distribution determination process (step S708). Specifically, when the start target of the game round is the first suspension information and the first suspension information corresponds to the low-probability jackpot result, the first low-probability jackpot flag is set to “1”, When the start time of the game round is the first hold information and the first hold information corresponds to the high probability big hit result, the first high probability big hit flag is set to “1”, and the game round start object is set. Is the second suspension information, and if the second suspension information corresponds to the low-probability jackpot result, the second low-probability jackpot flag is set to "1", and the start of the game round is the second suspension information. If the second suspension information corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result, the second high-accuracy jackpot flag is set to “1”. In the following description, the process of determining whether or not the result is various jackpots is performed by determining whether or not "1" is set in a corresponding flag of the main RAM 84. The state in which “1” is set in step S708 is cleared to “0” when the special power ending process described later ends when the open / close execution mode ends.

  After executing the jackpot result flag setting process, a jackpot result stop result setting process is executed (step S709). More specifically, the information on the pattern stop mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of the current game round, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance for the jackpot result. The specified information is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the big hit result. In step S709, the main RAM 84 stores information on the pattern stop mode according to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S708. It should be noted that a pattern stop mode may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. The method of selecting a stop result for a jackpot result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, but a configuration in which the stop result is selected according to, for example, a value of a jackpot type counter C2 may be employed.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is not the jackpot result (step S706: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S710). Specifically, in the current game round, the information of the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. From the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result, and is common to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. One type.

  On the other hand, when an affirmative determination is made in step S704, that is, when the game time is being executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special power control process (FIGS. 10 and 11), and the start of the game time has been suspended. If the information corresponds to the jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the miss result described above is executed without executing the hit / fail judgment process (step S710). In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which even if the game time is being executed on one of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b, the game time can be started on the other. However, if the pending information that triggered the start of the game round that has already been executed corresponds to any of the jackpot results, the newly executed game round will have the hold information that triggered the start. Regardless of whether it corresponds to the jackpot result or not, it becomes the game time corresponding to the off result. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to the jackpot results from being repeatedly executed. Also, in the case where the start of a new game round is prevented if the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed, the hold information that is the start target of the game round has been acquired. Regardless, at the point when a new game round is not started, it may become clear that the currently executed game round is the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, but the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed Even if it has been done, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring by adopting a configuration in which a new game round can be started.

  When the processing of step S709 or step S710 has been executed, a specific processing of the variable display period is executed (step S711). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the process of specifying the variable display period. In the process of specifying the variable display period, first, in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure, the side where the hold information that is the target of starting the current game round is stored. It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the provided set flag (step S801). Although the details of the set flag will be described later, if the fluctuation display period of the game corresponding to the hold information which is the start target of the current game is determined to be the adjustment period, the data corresponding to that is displayed. This is the area for setting. If "1" is set in the set flag (step S801: YES), the corresponding process (step S806) is executed, and the content of the process will be described later.

  If "1" is not set in the set flag (step S801: NO), the variable display period table is read from the main ROM 83 (step S802). Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the game time to be started this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. In this case, when the game time being the current start target corresponds to the jackpot result, that is, the game time to be started in the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b is the target. If “1” is set in either the low-probability jackpot flag or the high-probability jackpot flag of the player, it is determined that a reach effect will occur. In addition, even when the game times targeted for the start this time do not correspond to the jackpot result, the current game among the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure If the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored on the side to be started is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach effect will occur. When it is determined that a reach effect is generated, the reach generation variable display period table stored in the main ROM 83 is read out from the main ROM 83, and when it is determined that no reach effect is generated, the reach display is stored in the main ROM 83. The variable display period table for reach non-occurrence is read from the main ROM 83.

  Thereafter, the current numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained (step S803), and the fluctuation display period is determined by collating the fluctuation display period table read out in step S802 (step S804). Then, the information of the determined variable display period is set in a special figure special power timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S805). The special figure special power timer counter is provided corresponding to each of the first special figure display part 37a and the second special figure display part 37b. In step S805, information on the variable display period is set in the special figure special power timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. Updating of the numerical information set in the special figure special power timer counter is executed in the timer update processing of step S210 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9). By the way, as the effect for the game round, the variation display of the pattern on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b and the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 are performed. When the game is ended, the state in which the stop result of the game is displayed is displayed as the final stop over the final stop period. In this case, the information on the variable display period read in step S804 is a period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the continuation period of the game times. In other words, the duration of the game times is the sum of the variable display period and the final stop period. The same applies to the variable display period read in step S806.

  Returning to the description of the special figure change start process (FIG. 13), after executing the process of specifying the change display period, the change command and the type command corresponding to the game time to be started this time are set to the sound light side MPU 93. (Step S712). The fluctuation command includes information on the fluctuation display period specified in step S711, and the game time to be started is displayed on either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Information indicating whether or not they are supported is included. Further, the fluctuation command includes information on whether or not to execute a reach effect. If the variable display period is completely different between the situation where the reach effect is not performed and the situation where the reach effect is performed, the information directly indicating whether or not to execute the reach effect is a command for variation. It does not have to be set. The type command includes information as to whether or not the game time that is to be started this time corresponds to the jackpot result. If the type corresponds to the jackpot result, the type of the jackpot result is any type of jackpot result. Is included.

  After that, in the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b, the display section which is the target of starting the current game round starts the variable display of the pattern (step S713). If the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10). If it corresponds to FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S714). Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is “0”, the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by adding 1 becomes the special figure fluctuation processing ( It becomes “1” corresponding to steps S306 and S406).

<Processing contents of MPU 93 on sound light side>
As described above, the information on the variable display period read as described above is set in the variable command and transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. In the following, a description will be given of a processing configuration for performing the execution control of the effect for the game round in the sound light side MPU 93. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 4 msec) in the sound-light-side MPU 93.

  First, a table setting process for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the main MPU 82 is executed (step S901). FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the table setting process. When the change command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 82 (step S1001: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S1002). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the result of the hit / fail judgment and the distribution judgment determined by the main MPU 82 at the start of the current game round is specified, and the specified information is transmitted to the sound light side. Write to RAM95.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information on the fluctuation display period included in the fluctuation command is information corresponding to the adjustment period (step S1003). The adjustment period will be described later in detail, but when the newly acquired hold information is the content of the adjustment occurrence target, the adjustment period is set as the duration of the game corresponding to the hold information acquired at that time. Period. If it corresponds to the adjustment period (step S1003: YES), the effect setting process (step S1007) corresponding to the adjustment period is executed, and the content of the process will be described later.

  If it does not correspond to the adjustment period (step S1003: NO), a process for determining the contents of the effect at the time of non-adjustment is executed. As a process for the determination, first, an effect lottery process is executed (step S1004). In the effect lottery process, if the current game time is the game time to be executed by the first special figure display unit 37a in the normal game state, the game time to be executed by the first special figure display unit 37a in the high probability state Or the second special figure display unit 37b is a game time to be executed in the high probability state, the content of the effect in the decoration area 43 of the symbol display device 41 is determined by lottery. For example, the motion pattern of the effect character G5 is determined by lottery, or the image display pattern other than the effect character G5 is determined by lottery. In this case, if the game time targeted for this start is a jackpot result, the selection probability of the high expectation effect is higher than the selection probability of the low expectation effect, and the game time targeted for this start is If the result is out of range, the selection probability of the low expectation effect is higher than the selection probability of the high expectation effect. In the effect lottery process, when the current game time is a game time to be executed by the first special figure display unit 37a in the normal game state, the first special figure display unit 37a is executed by the high probability state. If it is a game time, or if the second special figure display unit 37b is a game time to be executed in the high probability state and a game time in which a reach effect occurs, the type of the reach effect is determined by lottery. decide. In this case, if the game time targeted for the start this time is a jackpot result, the selection probability of the high expectation reach effect is higher than the selection probability of the low expectation reach effect, and the game targeted for the current start If the round is missed, the selection probability of the low-expected-reach reach effect is higher than the selection probability of the high-expected-reach effect effect.

  On the other hand, when the current game time is the game time to be displayed in the second special figure display unit 37b in the normal game state, the effect is determined to be a fixed effect pattern without executing the effect lottery process. When the second special figure display unit 37b is a variable display target in the normal game state, the effect for the game round corresponding to the second special figure display unit 41 in the symbol display device 41 is added to the additional decoration area 44 which is a part of the decoration area 43 as described above. Done. Then, in the effect for the game round in the additional decoration area 44, the symbols G8 to G10 are fluctuated and displayed on the front side of the background image, but other display effects are not executed. Therefore, as described above, in the case where the second special figure display unit 37b is a game time to be a variable display target in the normal game state, the fixed effect pattern is determined.

  After performing the effect lottery process, a stopped symbol determination process is performed (step S1005). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a low-probability jackpot result, information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of the same even symbols is established is determined as information of the current stop result, and If the game result of the game times is a high-accuracy jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same odd symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. Also, in the stop symbol determination processing, if the game result of the current game round is a departure result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the contents of the command for change. Then, when a reach effect occurs, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established and the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach effect does not occur, the information corresponding to the stop result in which both the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the reach symbols are not established is determined as the information of the current stop result.

  After that, a control table reading process corresponding to the content of the effect performed in the current game is executed (step S1006). In this process, the information of the fluctuation display period is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, the information of the fluctuation display period, the information of the game result specified in step S1002, and the effect lottery in step S1004. The control table corresponding to the combination of the information of the processing result and the information of the stop result determined in step S1005 is read out from the sound light side ROM 94 and written into the sound light side RAM 95. In the control table, the content of the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 64 corresponding to the effect for the current game and the content of the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 corresponding to the effect for the current game are set. The light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 are performed according to the control table.

  After that, a variation pattern command is transmitted to the display side MPU 103 (step S1008). The fluctuation pattern command includes information on the fluctuation display period of the game time to be started, information indicating whether the game time to be started corresponds to the jackpot result or the missed result, and Information indicating which of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b the target game time corresponds to, information on the result of the effect lottery process in step S1004, And information on the stop result determined in step S1005. Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command, the display-side MPU 103 starts display control for executing an effect for game play on the symbol display device 41. The details of the display control will be described later.

  In the table setting process, other processes are executed in addition to the above processes (step S1009). In other processes, a process for controlling the execution of the effect in a situation other than the above situation is executed. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode, the display light emitting unit 64, the speaker unit 65, and the symbol display device 41 read a table for controlling execution of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the first hold command indicating that the first hold information is newly obtained is received from the main MPU 82, the first hold command is transmitted to the display MPU 103, and the second hold information is newly obtained. When the second hold command indicating that the command has been received is received from the main MPU 82, the second hold command is transmitted to the display MPU 103. Further, when a first decrease command is received from the main MPU 82 indicating that the first hold information has decreased, the first decrease command is transmitted to the display MPU 103 to indicate that the second hold information has decreased. When the second decrease command is received from the main MPU 82, the second decrease command is transmitted to the display MPU 103.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15), after executing the table setting process, the light emission control process is executed (step S902), and the sound output control process is executed (step S903). In the light emission control process, the light emission of the display light emitting unit 64 is controlled in accordance with the table read into the sound light side RAM 95 in the table setting process of step S901. In the sound output control process, the sound output of the speaker unit 65 is controlled in accordance with the table read into the sound-light side RAM 95 in the table setting process in step S901. Thereafter, a pointer update process is executed (step S904). In the pointer update process, information setting for updating data to be referred to in the table read in the table setting process in step S901 to data corresponding to the next control process is performed.

<Processing contents of display side MPU 103>
Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration for controlling the execution of an effect for a game in the display side MPU 103. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a V interrupt process repeatedly started at a predetermined cycle in the display MPU 103, specifically, at a cycle of 20 msec.

  In the V interrupt processing, when a command has been received from the sound-light-side MPU 93 (step S1101: YES), a command corresponding processing is executed. In the command correspondence processing, a display pattern table for executing a display effect corresponding to the command received from the sound-light-side MPU 93 on the symbol display device 41 is read from the display-side ROM 104 and written into the display-side RAM 105. For example, when a variation pattern command has been received, a display pattern table for executing a display effect for a game corresponding to the variation pattern command on the symbol display device 41 is read. As described above, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which even if the game time is executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game time is executed on the other. In response to this, in the symbol display device 41, effects corresponding to the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are executed. When a game round is executed in both the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b, the effect for the game round corresponding to the game round in the first special figure display section 37a and the second game round are performed. A display pattern table corresponding to each of the effects for the game corresponding to the game time in the special figure display unit 37b is read, and the display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed in a mode corresponding to the two display pattern tables. Is done. In this case, in the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 4B, the effect for the game round corresponding to the second special figure display unit 37b is executed in the additional decoration area 44 and the first special figure display unit. The effect for the game round corresponding to 37a is executed in an area other than the additional decoration area 44 in the decoration area 43. In the case of the high probability state, as shown in FIG. 5A, the effect for the game corresponding to the first special figure display section 37a is executed in the first individual display area 45 and the second special figure display. The effect for the game corresponding to the portion 37b is executed in the second individual display area 47, and the effect for the game on the side where the reach effect has been started earlier is not limited to the corresponding individual display areas 45 and 47. This is also performed in the decoration area 43.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1101, or if the process in step S1102 is performed, a pointer update process is performed (step S1103). In the pointer update processing, information setting for updating data to be referred to in the display pattern table read in the command corresponding processing in step S1102 to data corresponding to the current control processing is performed.

  Thereafter, task processing is executed (step S1104). In the task processing, one frame of the image corresponding to the current update timing is displayed by referring to the data set in the area corresponding to the current control processing time in the currently read display pattern table. The calculation of the parameters necessary for the display on the device 41 is performed. After that, a drawing list output process is executed (step S1105). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current process on the symbol display device 41 is created, and the created drawing list is provided on the display control board 102. To a VDP (not shown). In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. The VDP causes the symbol display device 41 to display an image of one frame by creating drawing data in a frame area of a VRAM (not shown) according to the drawing list.

<Special map change processing>
Next, the special figure changing process executed in step S306 of the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10) and step S406 of the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11) will be described.

  In the case where the fluctuation display period of the current game time on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled has not passed, and when the display contents of the special figure display units 37a and 37b are updated, the special figure Data setting for updating the display contents of the display units 37a and 37b is performed. As a result, the display contents of the patterns on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled are updated to the display contents in the next order.

  The state at the start of the variable display of the pattern on the special figure display sections 37a and 37b and the update of the variable display of the pattern are performed in a fixed mode regardless of the result of the determination of the success or failure and the result of the distribution determination. It is performed in a fixed manner regardless of the contents of the effect for the game round in 41. For example, when a plurality of predetermined update timings occur, the display content of the picture goes around once and a display pattern in which the display order is a fixed order is repeatedly performed. In any case, the stop result determined at the start of the game round is displayed. This makes it possible to simplify the processing configuration for controlling the display of the special figure display units 37a and 37b.

  On the other hand, when the variable display period has elapsed, a final stop command is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93. The final stop command includes information corresponding to the side of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b where the variable display period has elapsed. After that, at the start of the game which is to be ended this time, the information on the pattern stop mode of the special figure display units 37a and 37b stored in the main RAM 84 is read. As a result, the variation display of the pattern is stopped in a state where the pattern corresponding to the game result of the current game is displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled.

  Thereafter, information of the final stop period (specifically, 0.5 sec) is set in the special figure special power timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b to be controlled. Thus, the measurement of the final stop period is started. Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10). If it corresponds to FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special figure special processing counter is executed is “1”, the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by 1 is added to the special figure special processing determination processing ( "2" corresponding to steps S307 and S407).

<Processing during special figure determination>
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 18, the process of determining the special figure executed in step S307 of the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10) and step S407 of the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11). I will explain while.

  If the final stop period has elapsed (step S1201: YES) and the game result of the current game round is a jackpot result (step S1202: YES), the current special figure special power control process (FIG. 10, FIG. By determining whether or not the value of the special figure special power counter that does not correspond to FIG. 11) is "0", the special figure special power control processing that does not correspond to the current special figure special power control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) is performed. It is determined whether or not the game is being executed on the display units 37a and 37b (step S1203). If the value of the special figure special power counter that does not correspond to the current special figure special power control processing (FIGS. 10 and 11) is not “0” (step S1203: NO), the special figure special determination processing is terminated as it is. Does not execute the process for starting the open / close execution mode. Thereby, the special figure display on the side where the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed in a situation where the game round is being executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. When the game round in the units 37a and 37b ends first, the open / close execution mode is started after the game round in the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the side where the game round has not ended yet. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the currently executed game time from being forcibly ended upon the end of the game time corresponding to the jackpot result, and even though the game time is being executed. It is possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode from being started.

  By the way, as described above, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed triggered by the game time in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game time in the other is not newly started. Configuration. By providing the configuration and the configuration of step S1203, the game round is not executed in a situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the result of the game round in the situation where the game round is being executed, and to make the player pay attention to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed. Becomes

  If the value of the special figure special power counter not corresponding to the current special figure special power control processing (FIGS. 10 and 11) is “0” (step S1203: YES), the round counter RC provided in the main RAM 84 is used. “15” is set (step S1204). The round counter RC is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the remaining number of round games to be executed.

  After that, the information (specifically, 10 seconds) corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the jackpot result is set in the special figure special power timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b which triggered the current open / close execution mode. (Step S1205). Thereafter, an opening command is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 (step S1206). Thus, an effect corresponding to the opening period is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Further, a clearing process of the continuation period area is executed (step S1207). In the clearing process, details will be described later, but if the adjustment period is already set as the continuation period of the game time for the hold information different from the hold information that triggered the start of the game time, it is deleted. Execute the processing for performing.

  Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10). If it corresponds to FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S1208). Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special figure special processing is executed is "2", the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by adding 1 is the special power start processing (step S308). , "3" corresponding to step S408).

  In the special figure fixing process, if the final stop period has elapsed (step S1201: YES) and the game result of the current game round is not a jackpot result (step S1202: NO), the current process is executed If it corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special power counter is cleared to "0", and the current processing corresponds to the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11). If so, the value of the second special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S1209). As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start process (step S305, step S405).

<Special electricity start processing>
Next, the special power starting process executed in step S308 of the first special power special power control process (FIG. 10) and step S408 of the second special power special power control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

  In the special power start process, it is determined whether or not the opening and closing execution mode opening period has elapsed. When the opening period has not elapsed, this special power start process is terminated instead of waiting in the special power start process. Therefore, after the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode is started, the special power start process is started each time the special power special control process (FIGS. 10 and 11) is started until the opening period elapses. When the opening period has elapsed, the information (specifically, 29 seconds) of the opening duration of the round game is set in the special figure special power timer counter to be controlled, and the prize counter provided in the main RAM 84. The information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special power winning device 32 in one round game is set. Then, a special power release setting process is executed. In the opening setting process, data setting for setting the special power winning device 32 to an open state is performed. Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10). If it corresponds to FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special power starting processing is executed is “3”, the value of the special figure special power counter targeted for the addition by adding 1 is the special power open processing (step S309, It becomes "4" corresponding to step S409).

<Processing during opening of special electricity>
Next, the special power release processing executed in step S309 of the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10) and step S409 of the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11) will be described.

  In the special power opening processing, the closing setting processing is executed when the opening duration of the special power prize device 32 has elapsed or when the special prize winning device 32 has won the maximum number of game balls. In the closing setting process, data setting for setting the special power winning device 32 to be in a closed state is performed. As a result, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Thereafter, the value of the round counter RC of the main RAM 84 is subtracted by one, and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC after the subtraction is “0”.

  If the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the information corresponding to the closing duration (specifically, 2 seconds) is transmitted to the special map display units 37a and 37b that triggered the current open / close execution mode. Set in the figure special power timer counter. Thereafter, in order to switch the process to be controlled to the special power closing process (step S310, step S410), if the current process corresponds to the first special power special control process (FIG. 10), the first special power special control is performed. The value of the counter is incremented by one, and if the current processing corresponds to the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special power special opening processing is executed is "4", the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by 1 is added to the special power special closing counter processing (step S310). , Step S410).

  On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC is “0”, the information (specifically, 10 seconds) corresponding to the ending period corresponds to the special figure display units 37a and 37b that triggered the current open / close execution mode. Set in the special figure special power timer counter. The ending command is transmitted to the MPU 93 on the sound light side. Thus, an effect corresponding to the ending period is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65. Thereafter, in order to switch the processing to be controlled to the special power ending processing (steps S311 and S411), if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), the first special figure special power counter If the current processing corresponds to the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special power counter is added by two. Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special power special opening processing is executed is “4”, the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by adding 2 is the special power end processing (step S311). It becomes "6" corresponding to step S411).

<Treatment during special electricity closure>
Next, the special power closing process executed in step S310 of the first special power control process (FIG. 10) and step S410 of the second special power control process (FIG. 11) will be described.

  When the closing continuation period has elapsed, information on the opening period of the round game (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter to be controlled, and the one-time prize counter in the main RAM 84 is set. Information (specifically, “10”) corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special power winning device 32 in the round game is set. Then, a special power release setting process is executed. In the opening setting process, data setting for setting the special power winning device 32 to an open state is performed. Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special power counter is decremented by 1, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10). If it corresponds to FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special power counter is decremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special power closed processing is executed is "5", the value of the special figure special power counter which is subtracted by 1 is reduced during the special power open processing (step S309). , "4" corresponding to step S409).

<Special electricity termination processing>
Next, the special power ending processing executed in step S311 of the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10) and step S411 of the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11) will be described.

  If the ending period has elapsed, a game state setting process is executed. In the game state setting process, if “1” is set in the first high-accuracy jackpot flag or the second high-accuracy jackpot flag of the main RAM 84, the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time Is set to "1" in the high probability flag and the support flag provided in the main RAM 84. The high-probability flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high-probability mode. The support flag indicates whether the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. This is a flag to be specified by the MPU 82. The game state becomes the high probability state by setting "1" to the high probability flag and the support flag. In the game state setting process, when the first low-probability jackpot flag or the second low-probability jackpot flag of the main RAM 84 is set to “1”, the opening / closing execution mode is started this time. Since the jackpot result is a low-probability jackpot result, both the high probability flag and the support flag of the main RAM 84 are cleared to "0". When the values of the high probability flag and the support flag become “0”, the gaming state becomes the normal gaming state.

  Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10), the value of the first special figure special power control counter is cleared to "0", and the current processing is performed by the second special figure special power control. If it corresponds to the process (FIG. 11), the value of the second special figure special power counter is cleared to "0". As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start process (step S305, step S405).

<Adjustment of the duration of game times using look-ahead of pending information>
Next, a configuration for adjusting the continuation period of the game times using the look-ahead of the hold information will be described.

  As described above, even if the game time is being executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game time can be started on the other. If a game round corresponding to the jackpot result is already being executed and a new game round is started, the hold information that triggered the start of the newly started game round will be released as a hold corresponding to the missed result. Treated as information. In this case, in the situation where the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result becomes a start timing of a new game round, the hold information that should correspond to the jackpot result Is treated as corresponding to the departure result, and the occurrence of the jackpot result of the newly started game round is substantially invalidated.

  In this configuration, in the pachinko machine 10, when the suspension information is newly acquired in the high probability state in which the execution of the game round is likely to occur in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the acquisition is performed. At that time, it is read in advance whether or not the hold information corresponds to the jackpot result, and if it is specified that the hold information corresponds to the jackpot result, the hold information acquired earlier than the hold information corresponds to the start timing. Is set to a predetermined adjustment period, and the duration of the game times when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is a start trigger. In this way, in the situation where the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed, the game round triggered by the hold information that should originally correspond to the jackpot result is started, so that the hold It becomes possible to invalidate the jackpot result corresponding to the information. In addition, in a situation where a game round corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed, the game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is prevented from being started, so that the jackpot result corresponding to the hold information is prevented. Can be prevented from being invalidated.

  The adjustment of the duration of the game round based on the prefetching is performed only on the first suspension information if the newly acquired suspension information is the first suspension information, and is not performed on the second suspension information. Further, the adjustment of the duration of the game times based on the pre-reading is executed only for the second holding information if the newly acquired holding information is the second holding information, and is executed for the first holding information. Not done. Thereby, the adjustment of the duration of the game times triggered by the acquisition of the first hold information is limited to the game times corresponding to the first hold information, and the adjustment of the duration of the game times triggered by the acquisition of the second hold information Can be limited to the game times corresponding to the second hold information, so that the processing load for adjusting the duration of the game times can be prevented from being extremely increased.

  In addition, the manner of adjusting the duration of the game times is determined as to whether the newly acquired suspension information is the first suspension information or the second suspension information, and a jackpot corresponding to the newly acquired suspension information. Uniquely corresponds to a combination of the type of the result and the number of storages of the hold information of the same system (either the first hold information or the second hold information) as the hold information at the timing when the hold information is newly acquired. Is set. That is, without considering the execution status of the game times at the timing when the suspension information is newly acquired, or the storage number of the suspension information of a system different from the suspension information at the timing when the suspension information is newly acquired, How to adjust the duration of the times is determined. This makes it possible to prevent the processing load for adjusting the duration of the game times from being extremely increased.

  Hereinafter, a method of adjusting the duration of the game round will be specifically described. First, how to adjust the duration of the game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is obtained while the other is obtained. Will be described. FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (g) show a situation where one of the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result has been obtained, and the other is obtained. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to adjust the duration of a game round in a case. The adjustment of the duration of the game times is performed in the high probability state and is not performed in the normal game state. Therefore, the following description will be made on the assumption that the game state is the high probability state.

  As shown in FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (c), when one or more pieces of the first hold information have been obtained and the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result has been newly obtained, the first hold information has already been obtained. It is adjusted so that the total of the durations of the game times corresponding to the performed first hold information becomes 120 seconds which is the first adjustment total period. In other words, as shown in FIG. 19A, in a situation where three pieces of the first hold information are obtained, if the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is newly obtained, the three pieces of the already obtained three pieces of the first hold information are obtained. Is set to 40 seconds obtained by dividing the first adjustment total period by “3” which is the number of acquired first hold information. Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, in a situation where two pieces of the first hold information are obtained, when the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is newly obtained, two pieces of the already obtained two pieces of the first hold information are obtained. Is set to 60 seconds obtained by dividing the first adjustment total period by “2”, which is the number of acquired first hold information, in each of the game times corresponding to the first hold information. Also, as shown in FIG. 19C, in a situation where one piece of the first hold information has been obtained, when the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is newly obtained, one piece of the already obtained one piece of the hold information is obtained. Is set to 120 seconds obtained by dividing the first adjustment total period by “1”, which is the number of acquired suspension information. Further, as shown in FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (d), the duration of the game times of the first suspension information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is set to 1 second which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 19 (a) to 19 (f), when one or more pieces of the second hold information are obtained and the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly obtained, Each of the continuation periods of the game times corresponding to the already acquired second hold information is set to 1 second which is the shortest adjustment period. Further, as shown in FIGS. 19A to 19G, the duration of the game times of the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is set to 250 seconds, which is the second opportunity adjustment period.

  By adjusting the duration of the game times as described above, the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is obtained in a situation where the hold information not corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained as the first hold information. And when the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained, the game is executed with the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result as a trigger, and the low-accuracy jackpot result is obtained. , It becomes easier to start the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the game. Specifically, when the adjustment of the duration of the game is not performed, the duration of the game that can be selected is 1 second to 100 seconds. Then, the minimum time required for starting the game corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result in the first special figure display unit 37a is 120 seconds, and the maximum time is 220 seconds. On the other hand, the minimum time required for starting the game corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result in the second special map display unit 37b is 0 second, the maximum time is 103 seconds, and In the figure display section 37b, the duration of the game times corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is 250 seconds.

  In this case, the time required to start the game round corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result in the first special-figure display section 37a is 120 seconds, which is the minimum time, and the high-probability jackpot result is displayed in the second special-figure display section 37b. Even if the time required until the game round corresponding to is started is 103 seconds, which is the maximum time, the difference between the minimum time and the maximum time is 17 seconds shorter than the second opportunity adjustment period of 250 seconds. Therefore, in the situation where the game time corresponding to the high-accuracy big-hit result is being executed in the second special-figure display unit 37b, the game time of the first suspension information corresponding to the low-probability-big-hit result in the first special figure display unit 37a Is started, and the low-probability jackpot result is invalidated. In addition, the time required for the game round corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result to be started in the first special-figure display unit 37a is 220 seconds, which is the maximum time. Even if the time required for the corresponding game round to be started is 0 seconds, which is the minimum time, the difference between the maximum time and the minimum time is 220 seconds, which is shorter than the second opportunity adjustment period of 250 seconds. Therefore, in the situation where the game times corresponding to the high-accuracy big-hit results are being executed in the second special-figure display unit 37b, the game times of the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability-big-hit results in the first special-figure display unit 37a are changed. It will be started and the low probability jackpot result will be invalidated.

  However, as shown in FIG. 19 (d), when the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is obtained in a situation where the first hold information is not obtained, the first corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is obtained. The game time cannot be executed over the first adjustment total period in the first special figure display section 37a before the suspension information triggers the start of the game time. In this case, a game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result may be started earlier than a game cycle triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result. High in nature. In this configuration, the duration of the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is set to 1 second, so the game cycle triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result Is being executed, the possibility that the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is reduced, and the possibility that the high-probability jackpot result is invalidated is reduced. It becomes possible to reduce.

  The manner in which the low-probability jackpot result is invalidated will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (f). FIG. 20A shows the duration of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, FIG. 20B shows the acquisition timing of the first suspension information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result, and FIG. Indicates the number of pieces of the first hold information stored and held, FIG. 20 (d) shows the duration of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b, and FIG. 20 (e) corresponds to the high probability big hit result. The acquisition timing of the second suspension information is shown, and FIG. 20 (f) shows the number of the second suspension information stored on the suspension.

  First, in a situation where one first hold information not corresponding to the jackpot result is stored, the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is obtained, and three second hold information not corresponding to the jackpot result are stored. The case where the second suspension information corresponding to the high-accuracy big-hit result is acquired in the situation described above will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a) and FIG. 20 (d), at the timing of t1, which is a situation where the game times are being executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. As shown in FIG. 20 (b), the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is acquired, and as shown in FIG. 20 (c), the number of held first hold information increases from one to two. In this case, the duration of the game time corresponding to the already stored first hold information is set to 120 seconds, which is the first adjustment total period, and the game time corresponding to the first hold information acquired this time is set. The duration is set to 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, when the game round in the first special figure display unit 37a ends, the game round in the first special figure display unit 37a is started at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. In this case, the first adjustment total period has already been set as the continuation period of the game times for the first hold information that is the start opportunity of the game times. Therefore, the game times started at the timing of t2 continue over the first adjustment total period.

  Then, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 20 (e), the second holding information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired, and as shown in FIG. To four. In this case, the continuation period of the game times corresponding to each of the already stored second hold information is set to 1 second which is the shortest adjustment period, and the continuation of the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time. The period is set to the second opportunity adjustment period of 250 seconds.

  After that, at the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6 in the first special figure display unit 37a in which the continuation period is set to the first adjustment total period, the timing of FIG. As shown in FIG. 20D and FIG. 20F, game times whose duration is the shortest adjustment period are started. 20 (d) and FIG. 20 (f) at the timing t7 when the game time is still continuing in the first special figure display unit 37a in which the continuation period is set to the first adjustment total period. As shown, the game round triggered by the second suspension information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is started. This game time continues for the second opportunity adjustment period of 250 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (c), at the timing t8 when the game round triggered by the second suspension information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is continued. A game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is started. In this case, the first hold information is treated as a miss result without performing the hit / fail judgment processing, and thus the low-probability jackpot result is invalidated.

  Next, in a situation where three pieces of the first hold information that do not correspond to the jackpot result are stored, the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is obtained, and the game round in the second special figure display unit 37b is executed. The case where the second suspension information corresponding to the high-accuracy big-hit result is acquired in a situation where it is not performed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), at the timing t9 when the game is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, as shown in FIG. 2 Hold information is obtained. In this case, since the second suspension information is not stored separately and the game round is not executed in the second special figure display unit 37b, the second hold information is not stored as shown in FIG. A game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the acquired high-accuracy jackpot result is started. The duration of the game round is set to 250 seconds, which is the second opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (d), at the timing of t10, which is a situation where the game times are being executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. As shown in FIG. 20 (b), the first suspension information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is acquired, and the number of suspensions of the first suspension information is increased from three to four as shown in FIG. 20 (c). . In this case, each of the continuation periods of the game times corresponding to the respective first hold information already stored is set to 40 seconds, which is the result of dividing the first adjustment total period by “3”, and is acquired this time. The duration of the game corresponding to the first hold information is set to 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  After that, at the timing of t11, the timing of t12, and the timing of t13 in the second special figure display unit 37b in which the continuation period is set to the second opportunity adjustment period, the timing of FIG. As shown in FIG. 20A and FIG. 20C, game times each having a duration of 40 seconds are started. 20 (a) and 20 (c) at the timing t14 when the game time is still continuing in the second special figure display unit 37b in which the continuation period is set to the second opportunity adjustment period. As shown, the game round triggered by the first suspension information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is started. In this case, the first hold information is treated as a miss result without performing the hit / fail judgment processing, and thus the low-probability jackpot result is invalidated. Further, the game time continues for one second which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 20 (a), at the timing of t15, which is the timing after the end of the game cycle in the first opportunity adjustment period in the first special figure display unit 37a, as shown in FIG. The game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result in the 2 special figure display section 37b ends. In this case, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the result of the high-accuracy jackpot is started.

  Next, the adjustment of the duration of the game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. The method will be described. FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (g) show the situation where one of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the low-accuracy jackpot result has been acquired, and the other has been acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to adjust the duration of a game round in a case. The adjustment of the duration of the game times is performed in the high probability state and is not performed in the normal game state. Therefore, the following description will be made on the assumption that the game state is the high probability state.

  As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (e) to 21 (f), when one or more pieces of second hold information are obtained, the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is newly obtained. In this case, the total of the durations of the game times corresponding to the already acquired second hold information is adjusted to be 480 seconds, which is the second adjustment total period. That is, as shown in FIG. 21 (a), in a case where three pieces of second hold information are obtained, when the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is newly obtained, three pieces of already obtained three pieces of hold information are obtained. Is set to 160 seconds obtained by dividing the second adjustment total period by “3” which is the number of acquired second hold information. Also, as shown in FIG. 21 (e), in the case where two pieces of second hold information are obtained, when the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is newly obtained, two pieces of already obtained two pieces of hold information are obtained. Is set to 240 seconds obtained by dividing the second adjustment total period by “2” which is the number of acquired second hold information. Also, as shown in FIG. 21 (f), in a situation where one piece of second hold information has been obtained, when the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is newly obtained, one piece of already obtained second hold information is obtained. Is set to 480 seconds obtained by dividing the second adjustment total period by “1” which is the number of acquired second hold information. Further, as shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (g), the duration of the game times of the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is set to 1 second which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (c), when one or more pieces of the first hold information are obtained and the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly obtained, The total of the durations of the game times corresponding to the already obtained first hold information is adjusted to be 360 seconds, which is the third adjustment total period. That is, as shown in FIG. 21A, in a situation where three pieces of the first hold information are obtained, when the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly obtained, the three pieces of the already obtained three pieces of the hold information are obtained. Is set to 120 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by “3”, which is the number of acquired first hold information, in each of the game times corresponding to the first hold information. Also, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), when two pieces of the first hold information are obtained and the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly obtained, two pieces of the already obtained two pieces of the first hold information are obtained. Is set to 180 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by “2”, which is the number of acquired first hold information, in each of the game times corresponding to the first hold information. Also, as shown in FIG. 21 (c), in the case where one piece of the first hold information is obtained, when the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly obtained, the one already obtained The duration of the game corresponding to the first hold information is set to 360 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by “1” which is the number of acquired first hold information. Also, as shown in FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (g), the duration of the game times of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is set to 600 seconds which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

  By adjusting the duration of the game times as described above, the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is obtained in a situation where the hold information not corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained as the second hold information. In addition, when the first hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is obtained, the low-probability jackpot result is obtained in the situation where the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is executed. , It becomes easier to start a game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to. Specifically, when the adjustment of the duration of the game is not performed, the duration of the game that can be selected is 1 second to 100 seconds. Then, the minimum time required for starting the game corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result in the second special map display unit 37b is 480 seconds, and the maximum time is 580 seconds. On the other hand, the minimum time required until the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is started in the first special map display unit 37a is 0 second, the maximum time is 460 seconds, and In the figure display section 37a, the duration of the game corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is 600 seconds.

  In this case, the time required until the game round corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is started on the second special-figure display unit 37b is 480 seconds, which is the minimum time, and the high-probability jackpot result is displayed on the first special-figure display unit 37a. Even if the time required until the game round corresponding to is started is the maximum time of 460 seconds, the difference between the minimum time and the maximum time is 20 seconds shorter than the third opportunity adjustment period of 600 seconds. Therefore, in a situation where the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is being executed on the first special-figure display section 37a, the game cycle of the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result on the second special-figure display section 37b is performed. Is started, and the low-probability jackpot result is invalidated. Further, the maximum time required for the game round corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result to be started in the second special-figure display section 37b is 580 seconds, and the first special-figure display section 37a provides a high-probability jackpot result. Even if the time required for the corresponding game round to be started is 0 seconds, which is the minimum time, the difference between the maximum time and the minimum time is 580 seconds, which is shorter than the third opportunity adjustment period of 600 seconds. Therefore, in the situation where the game time corresponding to the high probability big hit result is being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, the game time of the second suspension information corresponding to the low probability big hit result in the second special figure display unit 37b is changed. It will be started and the low probability jackpot result will be invalidated.

  However, as shown in FIG. 21 (g), when the second suspension information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is acquired in a situation where the second suspension information is not acquired, the second corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is obtained. The game time cannot be executed over the second adjustment total period in the second special figure display section 37b before the suspension information triggers the start of the game time. In this case, the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result may be started earlier than the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result. High in nature. In this configuration, the duration of the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is set to 1 second, so the game cycle triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result Is being executed, the possibility that a game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is reduced, and the possibility that the high-probability jackpot result is invalidated is reduced. It becomes possible to reduce.

  The manner in which the low-probability jackpot result is invalidated will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (f). FIG. 22 (a) shows the duration of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, FIG. 22 (b) shows the acquisition timing of the first suspension information corresponding to the high probability big hit result, and FIG. 22 (c). Indicates the number of pieces of the first hold information stored and held, FIG. 22D shows the duration of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b, and FIG. 22E shows the low probability big hit result. FIG. 22F shows the acquisition timing of the second suspension information, and FIG. 22F shows the number of the second suspension information stored on the suspension.

  First, in the situation where one second hold information not corresponding to the jackpot result is stored, the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is obtained, and three first hold information not corresponding to the jackpot result are stored. The case where the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired in the situation described above will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (a) and FIG. 22 (d), at the timing of t1, which is a situation in which the game times are being executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, 22 (e), the second suspension information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is acquired, and the number of suspensions of the second suspension information increases from one to two as shown in FIG. 22 (f). In this case, the duration of the game time corresponding to the already stored second hold information is set to 480 seconds, which is the second adjustment total period, and the game time corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time is set. The duration is set to 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, when the game round in the second special figure display section 37b ends, the game round in the second special figure display section 37b is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 22D. In this case, the second adjustment total period has already been set as the continuation period of the game times for the second hold information that is a trigger for starting the game times. Therefore, the game times started at the timing of t2 continue over the second adjustment total period.

  Thereafter, at time t3, the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired as shown in FIG. 22B, and the number of held first hold information is three as shown in FIG. 22C. To four. In this case, each of the durations of the game times corresponding to each of the first hold information already stored is set to 120 seconds, which is a result of dividing the third adjustment total period by “3”, and is obtained this time. The duration of the game corresponding to the first hold information is set to 600 seconds, which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6 in the second special figure display unit 37b in which the continuation period is set to the second adjustment total period, the timing of FIG. As shown in FIG. 22A and FIG. 22C, game times each having a duration of 120 seconds are started. 22 (a) and 22 (c) at a timing t7 when the game time is still continuing in the second special figure display unit 37b in which the continuation period is set to the second adjustment total period. As shown, the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is started. This game time continues for the third opportunity adjustment period of 600 seconds.

  After that, at the timing t8, which is a situation in which the number of games triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result continues, as shown in FIG. 22 (c) and FIG. A game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is started. In this case, the first hold information is treated as a miss result without performing the hit / fail judgment processing, and thus the low-probability jackpot result is invalidated.

  Next, in a situation where three pieces of the second hold information that do not correspond to the jackpot result are stored, the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is obtained, and the game round in the first special figure display unit 37a is executed. A case will be described in which the first suspension information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained in a situation where the result is not performed.

  As shown in FIG. 22 (d), at the timing of t9, which is a situation in which a game round is being executed on the second special figure display unit 37b, as shown in FIG. 1 Hold information is acquired. In this case, since the first hold information is not separately stored and the game play is not being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, as shown in FIG. A game round is started with the first hold information corresponding to the acquired high-accuracy jackpot result. The duration of the game times is set to 600 seconds, which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 22 (a) and 22 (d), at the timing of t10, which is a situation where the game times are being executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (e), the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is acquired, and as shown in FIG. 22 (f), the hold number of the second hold information increases from three to four. . In this case, each of the continuation periods of the game times corresponding to each of the previously stored second hold information is set to 160 seconds, which is the result of dividing the second adjustment total period by “3”, and is obtained this time. The duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information is set to 1 second, which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  After that, at the timing of t11, the timing of t12, and the timing of t13 in the first special figure display portion 37a in which the continuation period is set to the third opportunity adjustment period, the timing of FIG. As shown in FIG. 22D and FIG. 22F, game times each having a duration of 160 seconds are started. 22 (d) and FIG. 22 (f) at a timing t14 when the game time is still continuing in the first special figure display unit 37a in which the continuation period is set to the third opportunity adjustment period. As shown, the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is started. In this case, the second hold information is treated as a missed result without performing the success / failure determination processing, so that the low-probability jackpot result is invalidated. Further, the game time continues for one second which is the first opportunity adjustment period.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (d), at the timing t15, which is the timing after the end of the game timing of the first opportunity adjustment period in the second special figure display section 37b, as shown in FIG. The game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result in the one special map display section 37a ends. In this case, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the result of the high-accuracy jackpot is started.

  Next, the adjustment of the duration of the game times when one of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired and the other is acquired. The method will be described. FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (g) show a situation where one of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result has been acquired, and the other is acquired. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating how to adjust the duration of a game round in a case. The adjustment of the duration of the game times is performed in the high probability state and is not performed in the normal game state. Therefore, the following description will be made on the assumption that the game state is the high probability state.

  As described above, when one or more pieces of the first hold information are obtained and the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly obtained, a game corresponding to the already obtained first hold information is obtained. The total of the durations is adjusted to be 360 seconds, which is the third adjustment total period. In other words, as shown in FIG. 23A, in a situation where three pieces of the first hold information have been obtained, when the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly obtained, the three pieces of the already obtained three pieces of the first hold information are obtained. Is set to 120 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by “3”, which is the number of acquired first hold information, in each of the game times corresponding to the first hold information. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), when two pieces of the first hold information are obtained and the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly obtained, two pieces of the already obtained two pieces of the first hold information are obtained. Is set to 180 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by “2”, which is the number of acquired first hold information, in each of the game times corresponding to the first hold information. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), in a situation where one piece of the first hold information has been obtained, when the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly obtained, one piece of the already obtained one piece of the hold information is obtained. The duration of the game corresponding to the first hold information is set to 360 seconds obtained by dividing the third adjustment total period by “1” which is the number of acquired first hold information. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 23A to 23G, the duration of the game times of the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is set to 600 seconds, which is the third opportunity adjustment period.

  In addition, as described above, when one or more pieces of the second hold information are obtained and the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is newly obtained, the second hold information corresponding to the already obtained second hold information is handled. The duration of each game round is set to one second, which is the shortest adjustment period. Further, as shown in FIGS. 23A to 23G, the duration of the game times of the second suspension information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is set to 250 seconds, which is the second opportunity adjustment period.

  By adjusting the duration of the game times as described above, the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained in a situation where the hold information not corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained as the first hold information. And when the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained, the game is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result, and then the high-accuracy jackpot result is handled. The game round triggered by the first hold information is easily started. Specifically, when the adjustment of the duration of the game is not performed, the duration of the game that can be selected is 1 second to 100 seconds. Then, the minimum time required for starting the game corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result in the first special map display unit 37a is 360 seconds, and the maximum time is 460 seconds. On the other hand, the minimum time required for starting the game corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result in the second special map display unit 37b is 0 second, the maximum time is 103 seconds, and In the figure display section 37b, the duration of the game times corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is 250 seconds. In this case, the time required for starting the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy big-hit result in the first special-figure display section 37a is 360 seconds, which is the minimum time, and the high-accuracy big-hit result is displayed in the second special-figure display section 37b. , The difference between the minimum time and the maximum time is 257 seconds longer than the first opportunity adjustment period of 250 seconds. It is. Therefore, after the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result on the second special-figure display section 37b ends, the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result on the first special-figure display section 37a is started, and both of the high round jackpots are started. The jackpot results are not invalidated.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 23D, when the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired in a situation where the first hold information is not acquired, the first corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained. The game time cannot be executed over the third adjustment total period in the first special figure display unit 37a before the suspension information triggers the start of the game time. In this situation, when the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired, the second hold information corresponding to the game round and the high-accuracy jackpot result triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result In the situation where one of the game rounds triggered is being executed, the other is executed, and the high-accuracy jackpot result of the side started later is invalidated.

  The manner in which the high-accuracy jackpot result is not invalidated will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. FIG. 24 (a) shows the duration of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, FIG. 24 (b) shows the acquisition timing of the first suspension information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result, and FIG. Indicates the number of pieces of the first hold information stored and held, FIG. 24D shows the duration of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b, and FIG. 24E shows the low probability big hit result. FIG. 24F shows the acquisition timing of the second suspension information, and FIG. 24F shows the number of the second suspension information stored on the suspension.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (a) and FIG. 24 (d), at the timing of t1, which is a situation where the game round is being executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, As shown in FIG. 24 (b), the first suspension information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired, and the number of suspensions of the first suspension information is increased from one to two as shown in FIG. 24 (c). In this case, the duration of the game time corresponding to the already stored first hold information is set to 360 seconds, which is the third adjustment total period, and the game time corresponding to the first hold information acquired this time is set. The continuation period is set to a third opportunity adjustment period of 600 seconds.

  Thereafter, when the game round in the first special figure display unit 37a ends, the game round in the first special figure display unit 37a is started at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. In this case, the third adjustment total period has already been set as the continuation period of the game times for the first hold information that is the start opportunity of the game times. Therefore, the game times started at the timing of t2 continue over the third adjustment total period.

  Then, at the timing of t3, the second hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is acquired as shown in FIG. 24 (e), and the hold number of the second hold information is three as shown in FIG. 24 (f). To four. In this case, each of the continuation periods of the game times corresponding to each of the already stored second hold information is set to 1 second which is the shortest adjustment period, and the game time corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time is set. Is set to 250 seconds, which is the second opportunity adjustment period.

  Then, at the timing of t4, the timing of t5, and the timing of t6 in the first special figure display unit 37a in which the continuation period is set to the third adjustment total period, the timing of FIG. As shown in FIG. 24D and FIG. 24F, game times whose duration is the shortest adjustment period are started. 24 (d) and FIG. 24 (f) at the timing t7 when the game times are still continuing in the first special figure display unit 37a in which the continuation period is set to the third adjustment total period. As shown, the game round triggered by the second suspension information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is started. This game time continues for the second opportunity adjustment period of 250 seconds.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 24 (d), the game round corresponding to the high-accuracy big hit result in the second special figure display unit 37b ends. However, at the timing of t8, since the game time in the first special figure display unit 37a in which the continuation period is set to the third adjustment total period is still continued, the open / close execution mode is waited without being started. At the timing, as shown in FIG. 24 (a), when the game time of the first special figure display unit 37a being executed is ended, the opening / closing execution mode, whose start is being waited for, is started.

  After that, at the timing of t10, which is the timing after the opening / closing execution mode started at the timing of t9 ends, as shown in FIG. 24A and FIG. The game round triggered by the information is started.

  Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration capable of adjusting the duration of the game times as described above. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a setting process at the time of acquisition executed by the main MPU 82. Note that the setting process at the time of acquisition is performed in step S505 in the process of acquiring the first hold information (FIG. 12A), and the process proceeds to step S605 in the process of acquiring the second hold information (FIG. 12B). Executed.

  When the setting process at the time of this acquisition is executed upon the acquisition of the first hold information (step S1301: YES), it is determined whether or not the acquired first hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. A determination is made (step S1302). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter is read out of the first reservation information acquired this time, and the numerical information is set in a high-accuracy determination table, which is a determination table that is referred to in a high-probability state. It is determined whether any one of the numerical information of the jackpot result matches. That is, whether the current game state is the normal game state or the high probability state is referred to the high-probability table. As described above, all types of numerical information that result in a large hit in the low probability table are included in the types of numerical information that result in a large hit in the high probability table. In this case, in step S1302, by referring to the high probability winning / failing table to determine whether or not the result corresponds to the jackpot result, the currently acquired suspension information is displayed in one of the normal gaming state and the high probability state. That is, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result.

  When the acquired first reservation information is the reservation information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S1302: YES), the first reservation information acquired this time among the first area 125a to the fourth area 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 Is set to the first jackpot hold flag provided in the area where is stored (step S1303). Here, the configurations of the first special figure reservation area 125, the second special figure reservation area 126, and the special figure execution area 127 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (d). . FIG. 26A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first special figure holding area 125, and FIG. 26B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the execution area 127a for the first special figure. FIG. 26 (c) is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration of the second special figure holding area 126, and FIG. 26 (d) is an explanatory view for explaining the configuration of the second special figure execution area 127b. FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 26A to 26D, first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125, an execution area 127a for the first special figure, and a second special figure holding area 126 In each of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d and the execution area 127b for the second special map, a winning random number area in which numerical information obtained from the winning random number counter C1 is stored, and a winning random number area obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 The jackpot type area in which the numerical information is stored, the reach random area in which the numerical information obtained from the reach random number counter C3 is stored, and the duration in which the numerical information of the adjustment period set as the duration of the game times is stored. An area and a set flag that stores information indicating that the adjustment period is set as the duration of the game times are set. The hit random number area and the duration area each have a 2-byte data amount, the big hit type area and the reach random number area each have a 1-byte data amount, and the set flag has a 1-bit data amount. Also, information indicating that the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special map holding area 125 correspond to the holding information that results in the jackpot in the high probability state is stored. A flag is set, and information indicating that the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126 correspond to the holding information that results in the jackpot in the high probability state is stored. The second jackpot hold flag is set. Each of the first jackpot hold flag and the second jackpot hold flag has a 1-bit data amount.

  When the first suspension information is newly acquired, a winning random number area in an area corresponding to the acquisition order of the first suspension information among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure suspension area 125, Numerical information of counters C1 to C3 respectively corresponding to the jackpot type area and the reach random number area is stored. If the first hold information corresponds to the hold information that results in a jackpot in the high probability state, the first hold information of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125 is used. The first jackpot hold flag is set to “1” in the first jackpot hold flag in an area corresponding to the information acquisition order, and the first jackpot hold flag is set to “0” when the hold information that results in the jackpot in the high probability state is not supported. Is maintained. Further, when the first reservation information corresponding to any one of the jackpot results is acquired in the high probability state, the first reservation information of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 is obtained. The information of the adjustment period is added to the continuation period area of the areas 125a to 125d corresponding to the information acquisition order and the continuation period area of the areas 125a to 125d corresponding to the first suspension information acquired earlier than the first suspension information. Is stored, and “1” is set in the set flag of each of the areas 125a to 125d. Then, when the first reservation information is to be a game start target and the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is shifted, the winning random number area and the jackpot type area of the first area 125a are performed. , The information stored in the reach random number area, the duration area, and the set flag are shifted to the corresponding areas in the execution area 127a for the first special figure. For the second area 125b to the fourth area 125d, the information stored in the hit random number area of the (n + 1) th area, the jackpot type area, the reach random number area, the duration area, the set flag, and the first jackpot hold flag are described. The shift to the corresponding areas in the n-th area is performed, and after the shift is completed, all the areas of the fourth area 125d are cleared to “0”.

  When the second reservation information is newly acquired, a winning random number area in an area corresponding to the acquisition order of the second reservation information among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126, Numerical information of counters C1 to C3 respectively corresponding to the jackpot type area and the reach random number area is stored. If the second suspension information corresponds to suspension information that results in a jackpot in the high probability state, the second suspension information of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure suspension area 126 is used. The second jackpot holding flag is set to “1” in the second jackpot holding flag in the area corresponding to the information acquisition order, and the second jackpot holding flag is set to “0” when the holding information that results in the jackpot in the high probability state is not supported. Is maintained. When the second reservation information corresponding to any one of the jackpot results is acquired in the high probability state, the second reservation information of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126 is obtained. The information of the adjustment period is stored in the duration area of the areas 126a to 126d corresponding to the information acquisition order and the duration area of the areas 126a to 126d corresponding to the second suspension information acquired earlier than the second suspension information. Is stored, and “1” is set in the set flags of these areas 126a to 126d. When the second reservation information is to be started and the second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 is shifted, the winning random number area and the jackpot type area of the first area 126a are performed. , The information stored in the reach random number area, the duration area, and the set flag are shifted to the corresponding areas in the execution area 127b for the second special map. For the second area 126b to the fourth area 126d, information stored in the hit random number area of the (n + 1) th area, the jackpot type area, the reach random number area, the duration area, the set flag, and the second jackpot hold flag are described. The shift to the corresponding areas in the n-th area is performed, and after the shift is completed, all the areas of the fourth area 126d are cleared to “0”.

  Returning to the description of the setting process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 25), after executing the process of step S1303, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (step S1304). If the state is not the high probability state (step S1304: NO), the processing for setting the continuation period of the game times to the adjustment period is not executed by ending the setting processing at the time of the main acquisition as it is. That is, in the normal game state, the duration of the game times is not set as the adjustment period. Thereby, in a situation where it is difficult to cause a situation where the game round is executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the duration of the game round is set to the adjustment period in a meaningless manner. It is possible to prevent it from being done.

  When the current gaming state is the high probability state (step S1304: YES), the first to-be-acquired information of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first toku-zu reservation area 125 is earlier than the currently acquired first on-hold information. It is determined whether “1” is set in the first jackpot hold flag of the areas 125a to 125d corresponding to the first hold information acquired in step S1305 (step S1305). That is, it is determined whether the first hold information acquired before the first hold information acquired this time is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1305, the processing for setting the duration of the game times to the adjustment period is not executed. In this way, when the first hold information that results in the jackpot in the high probability state has already been acquired, the adjustment period is not set as the duration of the game times for the first hold information. Becomes possible.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1305, it is determined whether the number of pieces of the first hold information held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is one (step S1306). A case where the first suspension information is acquired in a situation where the game time is not executed in the first special figure display unit 37a and the first suspension information is not stored in the first special figure reservation area 125; If the first suspension information is acquired in a situation where the first special figure display unit 37a is executing a game round and the first special figure reservation area 125 does not store the first reservation information, A positive determination is made in S1306. If a negative determination is made in step S1306, the setting of the front side hold for setting the duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information acquired earlier than the currently acquired first hold information to the adjustment period The processing is executed (step S1307). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1306, or if the process in step S1307 is performed, setting of the relevant hold for setting the duration of the game times corresponding to the first hold information acquired this time to the adjustment period. The processing is executed (step S1308).

  When the setting process at the time of this acquisition is executed upon the acquisition of the second hold information (step S1301: NO), it is determined whether or not the acquired second hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. A determination is made (step S1309). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter is read out of the second reservation information acquired this time, and the numerical information is set in the high-accuracy table, which is an authorization table referred to in the high-probability state. It is determined whether any one of the numerical information of the jackpot result matches. That is, whether the current game state is the normal game state or the high probability state is referred to the high-probability table. As described above, all types of numerical information that result in a large hit in the low probability table are included in the types of numerical information that result in a large hit in the high probability table. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether or not the suspension information corresponds to the jackpot result by referring to the high-accuracy winning / failing table. That is, it is determined whether or not it corresponds to the jackpot result.

  If the acquired second suspension information is the suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S1309: YES), the second suspension information acquired this time among the first area 126a to the fourth area 126d of the second special figure suspension area 126 Is set to the second jackpot hold flag provided in the area where is stored (step S1310). After executing the processing of step S1310, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state (step S1311). If the state is not the high probability state (step S1311: NO), the processing for setting the continuation period of the game times to the adjustment period is not executed by ending the setting processing at the time of the main acquisition as it is. That is, in the normal game state, the duration of the game times is not set as the adjustment period. Thereby, in a situation where it is difficult to cause a situation where the game round is executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the duration of the game round is set to the adjustment period in a meaningless manner. It is possible to prevent it from being done.

  If the current gaming state is the high probability state (step S1311: YES), the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126 are earlier than the second holding information acquired this time. It is determined whether or not “1” is set in the second jackpot holding flag of the areas 126a to 126d corresponding to the second holding information acquired in step S1312 (step S1312). That is, it is determined whether or not the second suspension information acquired earlier than the second suspension information acquired this time is suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, the process for setting the duration of the game times to the adjustment period is not performed. In this way, when the second hold information that results in the jackpot in the high probability state has already been acquired, the adjustment period is not set as the duration of the game corresponding to the second hold information. It becomes possible.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1312, it is determined whether the number of pieces of the second hold information held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is one (step S1313). A case where the second suspension information is acquired in a situation where the game times are not executed in the second special figure display unit 37b and the second suspension information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 126; and If the second special information is acquired in a situation where the game number is being executed on the second special figure display unit 37b and the second special information reservation area 126 does not store the second special information, An affirmative determination is made in S1313. When a negative determination is made in step S1313, the setting of the front side hold for setting the duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired earlier than the currently acquired second hold information to the adjustment period The processing is executed (step S1314). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1313, or if the process of step S1314 is performed, setting of the relevant hold for setting the duration of the game times corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time to the adjustment period. The processing is executed (step S1315).

  Next, the front side hold setting process executed in steps S1307 and S1314 in the setting process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 25) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not the hold information acquired this time is the second hold information and the hold information that results in a high-accuracy jackpot in the high-probability state (step S1401). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the second hold information acquired this time, and the numerical information is compared with one of the numerical information of the highly accurate jackpot result set in the distribution table. It is determined whether or not it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the shortest adjustment period setting process is executed (step S1402). Specifically, of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special map reservation area 126, the areas 126a to 126d corresponding to the second reservation information acquired earlier than the second reservation information acquired this time. Numerical information of the shortest adjustment period is set in the duration area of 126d. Thereafter, "1" is set to the set flag of the areas 126a to 126d in which the numerical information of the shortest adjustment period is set in the continuation period area among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special map reservation area 126 ( Step S1403).

  If the currently acquired suspension information is the first suspension information or the second suspension information that does not result in a high-accuracy jackpot in the high-probability state (step S1401: NO), if the first suspension information is acquired this time, The number of pieces of the first hold information acquired before the first hold information and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is grasped, and when the second hold information is obtained this time, the second hold information is used. Also, the number of pieces of the second hold information acquired earlier and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is grasped (step S1404). After that, the adjustment total period corresponding to the content of the hold information acquired this time is read from the main ROM 83. Specifically, similarly to the processing of step S1401, it is determined whether or not the currently acquired suspension information is the suspension information that results in a high-accuracy jackpot in the high-probability state. And the second suspension information. If it is the first hold information that results in a low-probability jackpot in the high-probability state, the numerical information of the first adjustment total period (specifically, 120 seconds) is read, and the high-probability jackpot result is obtained in the high-probability state. If it is the first hold information, the numerical information of the third adjustment total period (specifically, 360 seconds) is read, and if it is the second hold information that results in a low probability big hit in the high probability state, the second adjustment is performed. The numerical information of the total period (specifically, 480 seconds) is read.

  Thereafter, a period calculation process is executed (step S1406). Specifically, the numerical information of the adjustment total period read in step S1405 is divided by the number of the hold information read in step S1404. In this case, each adjustment total period is set to ensure that the result of the division is an integer. Then, the information of the adjustment period corresponding to the result of the period calculation process is set in the corresponding continuation period area of the first special figure reservation area 125 or the second special figure reservation area 126 (step S1407). For example, when the first reservation information is newly acquired, the first reservation information acquired earlier than the first reservation information acquired this time in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 is obtained. The numerical information calculated in step S1406 is set in the duration area of the areas 125a to 125d in which the information is stored. Further, for example, when the second reservation information is newly acquired, the second reservation information acquired earlier than the second acquisition information acquired this time among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126 is obtained. 2 The numerical information calculated in step S1406 is set in the continuation period area of the areas 126a to 126d storing the suspension information. Thereafter, the numerical information of the adjustment period is stored in the continuation period area of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 or the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126. The set flags of the set areas 125a to 125d and 126a to 126d are set to "1" (step S1408).

  Next, the setting process of the corresponding suspension executed in steps S1308 and S1315 in the setting process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 25) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, it is determined whether the first hold information or the second hold information acquired this time is hold information that results in a high-accuracy jackpot in the high-probability state (step S1501). Specifically, the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out from the first hold information or the second hold information obtained this time, and the numerical information is the numerical value of the high-accuracy jackpot result set in the distribution table. It is determined whether the information matches any of the information.

  If the currently acquired suspension information is the suspension information that results in a high-accuracy jackpot in the high-probability state and is the first suspension information (steps S1501 and S1502: YES), the first setting process is executed (step S1503). In the first setting process, the third opportunity adjustment period is set in the continuation period area of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special map reservation area 125 in which the currently acquired first reservation information is stored. Numerical information (specifically, 600 seconds) is set.

  If the currently acquired suspension information is the suspension information that results in a high-accuracy jackpot in the high-probability state and is the second suspension information (step S1501: YES, step S1502: NO), the second setting process is executed (step S1504). ). In the second setting process, the second opportunity adjustment period is set in the continuation period area of the areas 126a to 126d in which the currently acquired second reservation information is stored among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126. (Specifically, 250 seconds) is set.

  If the currently acquired suspension information is suspension information that results in a low-probability jackpot in the high-probability state (step S1504: NO), a third setting process is executed (step S1505). In the third setting process, if the currently acquired suspension information is the first suspension information, an area in which the currently acquired first suspension information among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure suspension area 125 is stored. Numerical information of the first opportunity adjustment period (specifically, one second) is set in the continuation period area of 125a to 125d, and if the currently acquired suspension information is the second suspension information, In the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d, numerical information of the first opportunity adjustment period (specifically, one second) is set in the continuation period area of the areas 126a to 126d in which the currently acquired second hold information is stored.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S1503 to S1505, the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 or the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126 are executed. Of the 126d, the setting completion flags of the areas 125a to 125d and 126a to 126d in which the numerical information of the adjustment period is set in the continuation period area are set to "1" (step S1506).

  When the above processing is performed, the duration of the game is set to the adjustment period. When the hold information in which the adjustment period is set is the start time of the game round, the process of step S806 is performed by making an affirmative determination in step S801 of the variable display period specifying process (FIG. 14). In step S806, if the game time to be started this time is the first special figure display unit 37a, the numerical information stored in the continuation period area of the execution area 127a for the first special figure is read out and read out. Numerical information obtained by subtracting the numerical information corresponding to the final stop period from the numerical information is specified as the fluctuation display period of the current game. Then, the numerical information of the specified variable display period is set in the special figure special power timer counter corresponding to the first special figure display unit 37a (step S805). In step S806, if the game time to be started this time is the second special figure display unit 37b, the numerical information stored in the continuation period area of the execution area 127b for the second special figure is read out. Numerical information obtained by subtracting the numerical information corresponding to the final stop period from the read numerical information is specified as the variable display period of the current game. Then, the numerical information of the specified variable display period is set in a special figure special power timer counter corresponding to the second special figure display unit 37b (step S805). Thereby, the adjustment period is set as the continuation period of the game times.

  When the adjustment period is set as the continuation period of the game times, the sound-light-side MPU 93 executes the reading process of the adjustment change table corresponding to the adjustment period in the table setting process (FIG. 16) (step S1). S1007). The adjustment fluctuation table is stored in the sound light ROM 94 in advance corresponding to each of the adjustment periods that can be set. When the effect for the game round is executed according to the adjustment fluctuation table corresponding to the adjustment period corresponding to the deviation result, the reach effect does not occur. On the other hand, when the effect for the game round is executed according to the adjustment fluctuation table corresponding to the adjustment period corresponding to the jackpot result, a reach effect occurs. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the reach effect is generated even when the effect for the game round is executed according to the adjustment change table corresponding to the adjustment period corresponding to the deviation result. . In addition, in the effect for the game corresponding to the adjustment period, an effect having a content that allows the player to recognize that the period is the adjustment period may be executed, and the effect for the game corresponding to the adjustment period may be performed. In the effect, an effect in which the effect of making the player recognize the adjustment period may not be executed may be adopted.

  If the hold information for which the adjustment period is set is the start time of the game round, the set adjustment period will be set as the duration of the game round, but the adjustment period will be set. If the open / close execution mode triggered by another hold information is started in a situation where the held hold information exists, all the adjustment periods set at that time are deleted. Specifically, in the special figure finalizing processing (FIG. 18), the processing of step S1207 is executed as a part of the processing for starting the open / close execution mode. In step S1207, all of the continuation period areas and the set completion flags in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure reservation area 125 and the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126 are set to " Clear "0". Thus, for example, in a situation where there is pending information for which an adjustment period is set, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by other pending information is executed, and the game state is set to a high probability state after the opening / closing execution mode ends. When the game mode shifts from the normal game state to the normal game state, it is possible to prevent the adjustment period from being set as the duration of the game times in the normal game state after the shift.

  Note that the clear processing corresponding to step S1207 may be performed before the first game round after the open / close execution mode ends, and for example, the clear processing corresponding to step S1207 is performed during the open / close execution mode. The configuration may be such that a clearing process corresponding to step S1207 is executed when the open / close execution mode ends. Further, when the game state after the open / close execution mode is the high probability state, the clear processing corresponding to step S1207 may not be executed.

  In steps S1302 and S1309 in the setting process at the time of acquisition (FIG. 25), even if the current gaming state is either the normal gaming state or the high probability state, the newly acquired hold information is a big hit result in the high probability state. It is determined whether or not the hold information is a hold information that becomes a jackpot result in the high probability state, and the jackpot hold flag corresponding to the hold information is set to “1” (step S1303, step S1303). S1310). This makes it possible to prevent the adjustment period corresponding to the first to third adjustment total periods from being set for the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability state.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information can be executed in an overlapping manner, the overall execution frequency of the game times can be increased. In this case, when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained, the relationship of the execution timing of each game round triggered by each of the hold information is predetermined. It becomes the relationship. As a result, each of the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are generated according to a certain rule. It is possible to make the relative execution timing preferable.

  Adjustment of the relative execution timing of each game time as described above is performed by adjusting the duration of the game time. This makes it possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects only by adjusting the duration of the game times.

  The game times triggered by the first hold information started earlier than the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, and the second hold information started earlier than the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result By adjusting the duration of at least one of the game times set as the game times, the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are triggered. The execution timing relationship with the game times is set to a predetermined relationship. As a result, it is possible to easily make the relationship between the execution timings of these game times a predetermined relationship.

  In a situation where the first suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result has been acquired while the first suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired, or in a situation where the second suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired. When the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained, the adjustment of the duration of the game times as described above is not executed. As a result, it is possible to achieve the above-described excellent effects without affecting the execution timing of the other suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result.

  According to at least one of the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the game time and the jackpot result corresponding to the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are triggered. The relationship of the execution timing with the game time triggered by the second hold information is changed. Thereby, it is possible to set the relative execution timing of each game round to a preferable one according to the type of the hold information.

  In a situation in which a game round triggered by one of the first hold information and the second hold information and the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed, the first hold information and the second hold information In the case where a game round triggered by the other hold information is started, the other hold information is not treated as the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. This makes it possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode starting condition triggered by the jackpot result from being satisfied even though the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result has already been executed.

  In this case, when the first suspension information corresponds to the high-probability jackpot result and the second reservation information corresponds to the low-probability jackpot result, the game triggered by the first reservation information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result The execution timing of these game times is adjusted so that the game times triggered by the second suspension information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result can be started in the situation where the times are being executed. Thereby, the game time triggered by the first pending information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result having a relatively high advantage is triggered by the second suspension information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result having a relatively low advantage. It is possible to invalidate the game times.

  Further, when the first hold information corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result and the second hold information corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result, a situation in which a game round triggered by one of the hold information is executed. Then, the execution timing of these game rounds is adjusted so that the game round triggered by the other is not started. Thereby, the game time triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result having a relatively high advantage and the second hold information corresponding to the high probability jackpot result having a relatively high advantage are triggered. It is possible to prevent one of the game times from being invalidated by the other.

  Based on the fact that the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained, the duration of the game times triggered by the first hold information is adjusted, and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained. Based on the second hold information, the duration of the game round is adjusted. Thereby, compared to a configuration in which only one of the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information is adjusted, the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result It is easy to make adjustments so that the execution timing relationship between the game times triggered by the game timing and the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result becomes a predetermined relationship.

  Based on the fact that the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has been obtained, the duration of the game round triggered by the first hold information is determined in a predetermined manner regardless of whether or not the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained. The duration of the game times triggered by the second suspension information is adjusted regardless of whether the first suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired based on the adjusted second suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result being acquired. Is adjusted in the manner described above. As a result, it is possible to simplify the processing for specifying the timing of executing each adjustment.

<Another form of the first embodiment>
The present invention is not limited to the above description of the first embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the following different configurations may be individually applied to the configuration of the first embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  -When the hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result is obtained as one of the first hold information and the second hold information and the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is obtained as the other hold information. If the hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is hold information that results in a high-probability jackpot result in both the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result among these hold information The duration of the game times may be adjusted so that the game times targeted for execution with the hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result are started after the game times targeted for execution of the game are completed. This makes it possible to continue the high probability mode while increasing the number of occurrences of the jackpot result as much as possible.

  ・ Adjust the execution timing relationship between the game times targeted for execution of the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the game times targeted for execution of the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result so as to have a predetermined relationship. The target is not limited to the duration of the game round, but in addition to or in place of the duration of the game round, for example, the period from the end of one game round to the start of the next game round The configuration to be adjusted may be used. For example, even if the game round on the first special figure display unit 37a ends in a situation where the first hold information is stored on hold, the game round on the first special figure display unit 37a is not changed until the game round is newly started. The configuration may be such that the start standby period is longer than the normal period, and a plurality of types of the start standby period may be set and the start standby period selected according to the type of the event to be adjusted may be different. . Further, for example, even when the game round on the second special figure display unit 37b ends in a situation where the second hold information is stored on hold, the game round on the second special figure display unit 37b is newly started. The start waiting period until may be longer than the normal period, and a plurality of types of the start waiting period may be set, and the start waiting period selected according to the type of the event to be adjusted may be different. Is also good. By adjusting the start waiting period in addition to the duration of the game times, the types of elements to be adjusted are increased, so that it is easy to make adjustments to make the execution timing of each game time a predetermined relationship. In addition, by adjusting the start waiting period instead of the duration of the game round, it is possible to make the relationship between the execution timings of each game round a predetermined relationship while not affecting the duration of the game round. Become.

  -The hold information of the adjustment trigger, which is one of the first hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result, the first hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result, and the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result, has been acquired. In this case, the duration of each of the first execution target game times is set so that the total period of the first execution target game times to be executed until the game time with the hold information of the adjustment trigger as the execution target is started is a predetermined period. Are configured to be set to the same period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the total period of the previous execution target game times is different from the predetermined period although the durations of the first execution target game times are different from each other. It is good also as a structure adjusted so that it may become. The configuration for making the durations of the game times to be executed earlier different from each other is arbitrary, but, for example, while the total period of the game times to be executed earlier is a predetermined period, each game time The duration may be determined by lottery, or the duration of each game may be determined in advance in relation to the number of game times to be executed first and the predetermined period. This makes it possible to diversify the manner of setting the duration of each game, even when the duration of the game is adjusted.

  -When the first suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired in a situation where the game round is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the game of the first special figure display unit 37a being executed at that time The duration of the game may be adjusted in consideration of the remaining period of the round. Further, when the second suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired in the situation where the game round is being executed on the second special figure display unit 37b, the second special figure display unit 37b being executed at that time is displayed. The configuration may be such that the duration of the game is adjusted in consideration of the remaining period of the game. For example, if the remaining period of the currently executed game cycle is relatively long, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result relatively shortens the period required until the game cycle to be executed is started. In the case where the remaining period of the currently executed game time is relatively short, the period required until the game time to be executed as the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is relatively long if the remaining time of the jackpot result is relatively short. Is also good. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result to be started until the game round to be executed is started to be unnecessarily long.

  -It is good also as a structure which does not produce a reach effect in the game time which is started before the game time corresponding to a jackpot result, and which is the adjustment target of the duration of the game time, and the reach effect is generated. It is good also as composition. Further, when a reach effect occurs, an effect corresponding to the game time whose duration of the game time has been adjusted may be executed. This allows the player to recognize through the contents of the reach effect that a jackpot result occurs in a game time subsequent to the game time in which the reach effect is to be executed.

  -The game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target and the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the departure result is the execution target of the first hold information and the second hold information are executed in an overlapping manner. In the situation where the game time for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends earlier, the opening and closing execution mode is started until the game time for which the hold information corresponding to the miss result is the execution target ends. Is not limited to the configuration that is delayed, and at the timing when the game information for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends, the game information for which the hold information corresponding to the miss result is the execution target is A configuration may be adopted in which the open / close execution mode is immediately started by forcibly terminating it. Thus, it is possible to prevent the period until the opening / closing execution mode is started from being lengthened.

  In addition, at the timing when the game round for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target is ended, the game round for which the hold information corresponding to the miss result is the execution target is temporarily stopped, and then the open / close execution mode ends. After that, the temporarily stopped game may be restarted, or the temporarily stopped game may be restarted from the beginning. In the configuration in which the game round once stopped is restarted from the beginning, it may be configured to newly execute a hit / fail determination process for the hold information that has triggered the start of the game round. It is good also as composition which succeeds a result.

  -In the situation where the game information for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target is being executed, if the game information for which the hold information on the side different from the hold information is to be executed is started, The hold information is not limited to a configuration that is treated as a departure result regardless of its content, and the hold information of the different side is subject to execution of the rejection determination process, but the hold information of the different side is subject to execution. When the game round ends, a configuration may be adopted in which the result is treated as a departure result regardless of the execution result of the hit / fail determination processing.

<Second Embodiment>
The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the manner in which the adjustment period is set. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a setting process at the time of acquisition in the present embodiment.

  When the hold information acquired this time is the hold information that results in a high-accuracy jackpot in the high-probability state (step S1601: YES), the hold information on the special map display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time has a high probability. In the state, it is determined whether or not there is the hold information that results in the low-probability jackpot (step S1602). Specifically, if the currently acquired suspension information is the first suspension information, the second suspension information stored in the second special figure suspension area 126 contains a low probability big hit result in the high probability state. It is determined whether or not the second hold information is present. If the hold information acquired this time is the second hold information, a high probability is included in the first hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 125. In the state, it is determined whether or not the first hold information that results in a low-probability jackpot exists. At the time of this determination, the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the hold information to be determined, and the numerical information matches with any one of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the high-probability table. Is determined. Then, when the jackpot result is supported, the numerical information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the hold information to be determined, and the numerical information is set to the low-probability jackpot result set in the distribution table. It is determined whether or not any one of the numerical information items matches.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, it is determined whether or not the currently acquired suspension information is suspension information that results in a high-accuracy jackpot in both the normal gaming state and the high probability state (step S1603). In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the numerical information group of the hit random number counter C1 that results in the big hit in the normal gaming state is included in the numerical information group of the hit random number counter C1 that results in the big hit in the high probability state. Have been. Therefore, in step S1603, the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the currently obtained hold information, and the numerical information matches with any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the low-probability table. Is determined.

  If the currently acquired hold information is the hold information that results in a jackpot in both the normal game state and the high probability state, the low information triggered by the hold information on the special map display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time is used. It is more advantageous for the player to start the game round with the high jackpot result triggered by the hold information acquired this time after the game round with the jackpot result ends. On the other hand, if the hold information obtained this time is the hold information that results in a big hit if the hold information is in the high probability state, the low-probability jackpot triggered by the hold information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information obtained this time It is more advantageous for the player to start the resulting game round in a situation where the game round with the high-probability jackpot result triggered by the hold information acquired this time is performed and invalidate the low-probability jackpot result.

  Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S1603, the first adjustment process is executed on the condition that adjustment is possible (step S1604: YES) (step S1605). In the first adjustment processing, in a situation where a game round with a high-accuracy jackpot result triggered by the currently acquired suspension information is executed, the suspension information on the special map display units 37a and 37b different from the suspension information acquired this time is displayed. Adjust each of the reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 and the second special figure reservation area 126 as the duration of the game round so that the game round with the low probability jackpot result triggered is started. Set the usage period. However, the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result on the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time is the next game start start timing on the different special figure display units 37a and 37b. And the current special game time is not executed on the different special figure display units 37a and 37b, or the current game time is executed on the different special figure display units 37a and 37b. Even if the game timing is ended, if the end timing of the current game is earlier than the end timing of the currently executed game on the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information acquired this time. In addition, it is not possible to set an adjustment period for causing the above-described event. In such a case, a negative determination is made in step S1604, and the first adjustment process is not executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1602, it is determined whether or not there is any hold information that results in a high-accuracy jackpot in the high-probability state as the hold information on the special map display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time. A determination is made (step S1606). Specifically, if the currently acquired suspension information is the first suspension information, the second suspension information stored in the second special figure suspension area 126 contains the second most probable result in the high probability state in the high probability state. It is determined whether or not the second hold information is present, and if the hold information acquired this time is the second hold information, the first hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 has a high probability. In the state, it is determined whether or not the first hold information that results in the high-accuracy big hit exists. At the time of this determination, the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the hold information to be determined, and the numerical information matches with any one of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the high-probability table. Is determined. If it corresponds to the jackpot result, the numeric information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the hold information to be determined, and the numeric information is set in the high-accuracy jackpot result set in the distribution table. It is determined whether it matches any of the numerical information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, the second adjustment process is executed on condition that the adjustment is possible (step S1607: YES) (step S1608). In the second adjustment process in the case of making an affirmative determination in step S1603, after the game round of the low-probability jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time is ended. For each of the pieces of hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 and the second special figure hold area 126 so that the game round with the high-accuracy jackpot result triggered by the hold information acquired this time is started. If the adjustment period can be set as the duration of the game, such adjustment period is set. In this case, for example, the game times are being executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, and the special figure display corresponding to the currently acquired suspension information among the game times is performed. The end timing of the units 37a and 37b is later than the end timing of the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the currently acquired suspension information, and the special figure display unit to which the currently acquired suspension information corresponds. On the side of the special map display units 37a and 37b, the hold information that is the next game start timing on the 37a and 37b sides and is different from the hold information acquired this time is the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result. In the case of the hold information that triggers the start of the game, the end time of the game is acquired this time, and the duration of the game is triggered by the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result. Special symbol display section 37a corresponding to the suspension information, than the game time of the end timing of the current in 37b side is set to be the front.

  Further, in the second adjustment process in the case of making an affirmative determination in step S1603, for example, the hold information is acquired earlier than the suspension information on the side of the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the suspension information acquired this time. Instead, the game times corresponding to the hold information acquired this time are prior to the game times triggered by the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result on the special map display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time. If it is necessary to start, the game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is started in the situation where the game round corresponding to the hold information acquired this time is being executed, An adjustment period is set as a continuation period of the game times for each of the hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 and the second special figure holding area 126.

  In the second adjustment process in the case of making an affirmative determination in step S1606, the game times of the high-accuracy jackpot result triggered by the hold information on the special map display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time, and the current acquisition The first special figure reservation area 125 and the second special figure reservation area 126 are arranged so that one of the game rounds out of the game rounds with the high probability jackpot result triggered by the held reservation information is started after the other game round is completed. An adjustment period is set as a continuation period of the game times for each of the hold information stored in.

  However, in a situation where the game round is not executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are displayed. Cannot be set to make the above-described event occur when the are acquired at the same time. In such a case, a negative determination is made in step S1607, and the second adjustment process is not executed.

  If the currently acquired suspension information is the suspension information that results in a low-probability jackpot in the high-probability state (step S1601: NO), the high-probability is used as the suspension information on the special map display units 37a and 37b different from the suspension information acquired this time. In the state, it is determined whether or not there is the hold information that results in the high-accuracy jackpot (step S1610). Specifically, if the currently acquired suspension information is the first suspension information, the second suspension information stored in the second special figure suspension area 126 contains the second most probable result in the high probability state in the high probability state. It is determined whether or not the second hold information is present, and if the hold information acquired this time is the second hold information, the first hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 has a high probability. In the state, it is determined whether or not the first hold information that results in the high-accuracy big hit exists. At the time of this determination, the numerical information obtained from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the hold information to be determined, and the numerical information matches with any one of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the high-probability table. Is determined. If it corresponds to the jackpot result, the numeric information obtained from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the hold information to be determined, and the numeric information is set in the high-accuracy jackpot result set in the distribution table. It is determined whether it matches any of the numerical information.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S1610, it is determined whether or not the hold information that results in the highly-probable jackpot is the hold information that results in a highly-probable jackpot in both the normal gaming state and the high-probability state ( Step S1611).

  If the hold information that results in the high-accuracy jackpot is the hold information that results in the jackpot in any of the normal gaming state and the high-probability state, after the game round with the low-accuracy jackpot result triggered by the hold information acquired this time, It is more advantageous for a player to start a game round with a high-accuracy jackpot result. On the other hand, if the hold information that results in the high-accuracy jackpot is the hold information that results in the jackpot if the hold information that has a high probability is in the high probability state, the game times of the low-probability jackpot result triggered by the hold information acquired this time are It is advantageous for the player to start in a situation where a game round is being executed and to invalidate the low-probability jackpot result.

  Therefore, if a negative determination is made in step S1611, the third adjustment process is executed on the condition that adjustment is possible (step S1612: YES) (step S1613). In the third adjustment process, in the situation where the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are different from the hold information acquired this time, are performing game rounds with high-accuracy jackpot results, the low-accuracy jackpot triggered by the hold information acquired this time is used. An adjustment period is set as a continuation period of the game round for each piece of the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 and the second special figure hold area 126 so that the resulting game round is started. However, this is the case where the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result acquired this time is the hold information serving as the next game start start trigger on the special figure display units 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information. In the case where the current game round is not executed on the side of the special figure display sections 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information, or in the case where the current game round is executed on the side of the special figure display sections 37a and 37b corresponding to the hold information. If the end time of the game is earlier than the end timing of the game currently being executed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time, as described above. It is not possible to set an adjustment period so that the event occurs. In such a case, a negative determination is made in step S1612, and the third adjustment process is not executed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1611, the fourth adjustment process is executed on condition that adjustment is possible (step S1614: YES) (step S1615). In the fourth adjustment process, after the game round of the low-probability jackpot result corresponding to the currently acquired hold information ends, the high-accuracy jackpot result on the special map display units 37a and 37b different from the hold information acquired this time corresponds to. An adjustment period can be set as a continuation period of the game round for each of the hold information stored in the first special figure hold area 125 and the second special figure hold area 126 so that the game round is started. In such a situation, such an adjustment period is set.

  In the fourth adjustment process, for example, the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which are different from the hold information acquired this time, acquire the hold information that triggers the start of the game round before the hold information corresponding to the high-accuracy jackpot result. No, the game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to the result of the high probability jackpot must be started before the game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to the result of the low probability jackpot obtained this time. If not, the first special map reservation area is set so that the game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is started while the game round corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is being executed. An adjustment period is set as the continuation period of the game times for each of the hold information stored in the 125 and the second special figure holding area 126.

  However, in a situation where the game round is not executed in both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are displayed. Cannot be set to make the above-described event occur when the are acquired at the same time. In such a case, a negative determination is made in step S1614, and the fourth adjustment process is not executed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired in one of the first hold information and the second hold information, the adjustment of the duration of the game times is not performed, but the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained. The adjustment of the continuation period of the game times is executed on the condition that both the game result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are acquired. This makes it possible to prevent the adjustment of the duration of the game from being performed in a situation where it is not necessary to adjust the duration of the game.

  Even when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are obtained, the execution timing of each game corresponding to the jackpot result cannot be the predetermined timing. If so, the adjustment of the duration of the game is not performed. This makes it possible to prevent the adjustment of the duration of the game from being performed in a situation where it is not necessary to adjust the duration of the game.

  Even when the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is obtained as one of the first hold information and the second hold information and the hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result is obtained as the other, If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the hold information that results in the jackpot result in either the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode, after the game round corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result ends, the high-probability jackpot result Is adjusted so that the game time corresponding to the game time is started. This makes it possible to increase the number of times the jackpot results occur while maintaining the high probability mode.

<Another form of the second embodiment>
The present invention is not limited to the description of the second embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following another embodiment may be individually applied to the configuration of the second embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  -In the situation where the game round corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is being executed, the hold information that is the jackpot result even in the low-probability mode has been acquired as the hold information on the side different from the hold information targeted for the execution of the game round. In this case, the low probability is set such that the game round triggered by the hold information that results in the jackpot result even in the low probability mode is started after the game round corresponding to the currently-probable low jackpot result ends. In the mode, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the period required until a game round triggered by the hold information that results in a big hit is started is adjusted. This makes it possible to increase the frequency of occurrence of the jackpot result.

  -In the situation where the game round corresponding to the high probability jackpot result is being executed, when the hold information corresponding to the low probability jackpot result is acquired as the hold information on the side different from the hold information targeted for execution of the game round. In such a case, the game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is started in a situation where the game round corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result currently being executed is being executed. A configuration may be adopted in which a period required until a game round triggered by the hold information corresponding to the result of the jackpot is started is adjusted. As a result, the high probability mode can be easily continued for a long time.

  -The game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target and the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the departure result is the execution target of the first hold information and the second hold information are executed in an overlapping manner. In the situation where the game time for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends earlier, the opening and closing execution mode is started until the game time for which the hold information corresponding to the miss result is the execution target ends. Is not limited to the configuration that is delayed, and at the timing when the game information for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends, the game information for which the hold information corresponding to the miss result is the execution target is A configuration may be adopted in which the open / close execution mode is immediately started by forcibly terminating it. Thus, it is possible to prevent the period until the opening / closing execution mode is started from being lengthened.

  -In the situation where the game information for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target is being executed, if the game information for which the hold information on the side different from the hold information is to be executed is started, The hold information is not limited to a configuration that is treated as a departure result regardless of its content, and the hold information of the different side is subject to execution of the rejection determination process, but the hold information of the different side is subject to execution. When the game round ends, a configuration may be adopted in which the result is treated as a departure result regardless of the execution result of the hit / fail determination processing.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the game area PA is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the center of the game area PA. Since the periphery of the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game balls fired in the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PA, an upper area PA11 which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and the lower area PA11 is continuous with the upper area PA11 below the upper area PA11. The left area PA12, which is the left area, the right area PA13, which is continuous below and below the upper area PA11 and is rightward of the variable display unit 36, and the left area PA12 and the right area PA13, respectively. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower region PA14 which is a region below the variable display unit 36 continuously below it.

  When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with the rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game ball is positioned leftward of the lateral center position in the upper area PA11. Flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA11 → the left area PA12 → the lower area PA14. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 with the rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second firing operation, the upper operation area PA11 is shifted rightward from the lateral center position. A game ball flows down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA11 → the right area PA13 → the lower area PA14. In other words, the player can play the game such that the game ball flows down the left area PA12 of the left area PA12 and the right area PA13 by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the firing operation device 28, and at the same time, adjusts the right operation area. A game can be played so that a game ball flows down the PA 13. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper area PA11 → the right area PA13 → the lower area PA14.

  A first operating port 33 is provided in the lower area PA14, as in the first embodiment. However, the second working port 34 and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment are not provided. Instead, in this embodiment, a first special ball entry device 131, a second special ball entry device 132, a first through gate 133, and a second through gate 134 are provided. The first special ball-entering device 131, the second special ball-entering device 132, the first through gate 133, and the second through gate 134 are provided in the right area PA13 of the game area PA. Further, a special electric winning device 32 is also provided in the right area PA13. In this case, a game ball flowing down the left area PA12 can win a prize in the first operating port 33, and the first special ball-entering device 131, the second special ball-entering device 132, the first through gate 133, and the second Winning to the through gate 134 and the special electric winning device 32 is not possible. The game ball flowing down the right area PA13 can win the first special ball-entering device 131, the second special ball-entering device 132, the first through gate 133, the second through gate 134, and the special electric prize winning device 32, Winning to the first operating port 33 is not possible. When one game ball enters the first special ball entry device 131, the number of game balls paid out is one, and one game ball enters the second special ball entry device 132. The number of game balls to be paid out in this case is also one. However, the configuration may be such that the number of payouts is different.

  The configuration of the first special ball entry device 131 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the configuration of the second special ball entry device 132 is the same as the configuration of the first special ball entry device 131. FIG. 31A is a longitudinal sectional view of the first special ball entry apparatus 131 in a non-accepting state. The first special ball entry device 131 discharges a game ball flowing from the game area PA and a base unit 141 having a discharge passage 143 formed for discharging the game ball flowing from the game area PA to the rear of the game board 24. And a guiding unit 142 for guiding to the passage 143. The entrance 143a of the discharge passage 143 has an opening area equal to or more than one game ball, and is opened toward the front of the pachinko machine 10. A detection sensor 131a is provided on the exit portion 143b side of the discharge passage 143, and a game ball that has won the first special ball entry device 131 is detected by the detection sensor 131a.

  The guiding unit 142 receives a game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 143a in the game area PA from below, guides the received game ball into the discharge passage 143, and into the discharge passage 143. The guide drive unit 145 for displacing between the initial position in which the guidance of the game ball is not possible and the guidance position in which the guidance is possible, and the discharge passage 143 when the guide member 144 is arranged in the initial position. A blocking member 146 disposed at a non-blocking position that does not block the flow of the game ball into the discharge passage 143 when the guide member 144 is disposed at the blocking position that blocks the inflow of the game ball into the guide path and the guide member 144 is positioned at the guiding position. , Is provided. The guide member 144 and the blocking member 146 are opposed to each other at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction such that the guide member 144 is located below. A transmission unit 147 is provided to transmit the driving force of the guide driving unit 145 to the guide member 144 and the blocking member 146.

  When the guide drive unit 145 is in the non-drive state, the guide member 144 is arranged at the initial position and the blocking member 146 is arranged at the blocking position by the biasing force of a biasing means such as a spring (not shown). In this case, the guide member 144 and the blocking member 146 are entirely buried in the discharge passage 143 and do not protrude into the game area PA. As a result, the game balls flowing down the area in front of the entrance 143a of the discharge passage 143 in the game area PA are not guided into the discharge passage 143 by the guide member 144 and the blocking member 146. The ball flows down the game area PA without entering the special ball entry device 131. In addition, since the blocking member 146 is disposed at the blocking position, the substantial opening area of the entrance 143a of the discharge passage 143 is less than one game ball. Thereby, in the situation where the guide member 144 is arranged at the initial position, it is possible to reliably prevent the game balls from entering the first special ball entry device 131.

  When the guide driving unit 145 is driven, the guide member 144 and the blocking member 146 are displaced against the urging force of the urging means, and the guide member 144 is arranged at the guiding position and the blocking member 146 is not moved. It is located in the blocking position. FIG. 31 (b) is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first special ball entry apparatus 131 in the guidance state.

  When the guide member 144 is located at the guide position, the distal end side of the guide member 144 protrudes from the entrance 143a of the discharge passage 143 toward the game area PA. The amount of protrusion is such that a game ball flowing down the area in front of the entrance 143a in the game area PA can be received from below. Since the top surface of the guide member 144 is inclined downward toward the entrance 143 a of the discharge passage 143, the game balls received from below at the front end of the guide member 144 are positioned on the top surface of the guide member 144. And is guided into the discharge passage 143. When the blocking member 146 is located at the non-blocking position, the blocking member 146 is displaced so that its tip is located above the blocking position. The ball flows into the discharge passage 143 without interfering with the blocking member 146. As a result, the guide driving unit 145 is driven, so that game balls flowing down the area in front of the entrance 143a in the game area PA enter the first special ball entry device 131. Hereinafter, for convenience of description, a state in which the guide driving unit 145 is in the non-driving state, the guide member 144 is disposed in the initial position, and the blocking member 146 is disposed in the blocking position is referred to as a closed state of the first special ball entry device 131. The state in which the guide driving unit 145 is in the driving state, the guide member 144 is located at the guide position, and the blocking member 146 is located in the non-blocking position is referred to as an open state of the first special ball entry device 131.

  The first special ball entry device 131 includes a cover member 148 provided so as to face the entrance 143a of the discharge passage 143 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The cover member 148 is formed in a gate shape so as to form a vertical passage portion 148a in a region in front of the entrance portion 143a in the game region PA, and one of the game balls passing through the front region of the entrance portion 143a at the same time. It is provided so as to restrict the game ball to the front and the lateral movement of the pachinko machine 10. This prevents a plurality of game balls from being simultaneously guided into the discharge passage 143 of the first special ball entry device 131 when the guidance unit 142 of the first special ball entry device 131 is in the guiding state. At the same time, it is possible to reliably guide the game ball passing through the front area of the entrance 143a into the discharge passage 143 in the guiding state.

  The first special ball-entering device 131 is switched from a closed state to an open state based on a prize in the first through gate 133, and the second special ball-entering device 132 is changed from a closed state to an open state based on a prize in the second through gate 134. Is switched to. Specifically, when a prize is generated in the first through gate 133, the hold information on the first general-purpose side is acquired with the upper limit storage number (specifically, four) as an upper limit. When the hold information on the first general-purpose side is stored, an internal lottery is performed, and the first general-purpose unit 38 of the general-purpose unit 38 provided at the lower left corner which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The picture change display is performed in the general-purpose display section 135. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a winning and a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display is ended, the first special ball-entering device 131 is opened in a predetermined mode. It should be noted that a first general-purpose reservation display unit 136 is provided at a position adjacent to the first general-purpose display unit 135, and the number of the reserved information on the first general-purpose side is indicated by lighting of the first general-purpose reserve display unit 136. Is displayed. In addition, when a prize is generated in the second through gate 134, the hold information on the second public figure side is acquired with the upper limit storage number (specifically, four) as the upper limit. When the hold information of the second general-purpose side is stored, the internal lottery is performed, and the second general-purpose unit 38 of the general-purpose unit 38 provided in the lower left corner which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. The picture change display is performed on the general-purpose display section 137. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a winning and a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed and the variable display is ended, the second special ball-entering device 132 is opened in a predetermined mode. It should be noted that a second general-figure hold display section 138 is provided at a position adjacent to the second general-figure display section 137, and the number of the hold information on the second general-figure side is indicated by turning on the second general-figure hold display section 138. Is displayed.

  In the right area PA13, a second through gate 134 is provided below the first through gate 133, and a first special ball-entering device 131 is provided below the second through gate 134, and the first special gate device 131 is provided. A second special ball entry device 132 is provided below the ball device 131, and a special electric winning device 32 is provided below the second special ball entry device 132. The first through-gate 133, the second through-gate 134, the first special ball-in device 131, and the second special ball-in device 132 are such that the lateral center at each entrance of the game ball is on the same straight line in the vertical direction. Are located in Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the first through gate 133 in the vertical direction surely passes through the second through gate 134, and the game ball that has passed through the second through gate 134 is opened by the first special ball entry device 131. If it is in the state, the first special ball-entering device 131 is reliably won regardless of the state of the second special ball-entering device 132, and the first special ball-entering device 131 is in the closed state and the second special ball-entering device 132 Is in the open state, the second special ball entry device 132 is reliably won, and if both the first special ball entry device 131 and the second special ball entry device 132 are in the closed state, it is directed toward the special electric winning device 32. Flow down.

  When a prize has occurred in the first operating port 33 or the first special ball-entering device 131, the first reservation information is acquired, and when a prize has occurred in the second special ball-entering device 132, the second reservation information has been obtained. Is obtained. In this case, when the game state is the normal game state and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, both the first special ball entry device 131 and the second special ball entry device 132 are unlikely to be in the open state, and the game state Is in the high probability state and the support mode is the high frequency support mode, both the first special ball entry device 131 and the second special ball entry device 132 are likely to be in the open state. When both the first special ball-entering device 131 and the second special ball-entering device 132 are in the open state in the high probability state, the period during which the first special ball-entering device 131 is in the open state and the second The periods during which the special ball-entering device 132 is open are adjusted so as to be different from the periods during which the special ball-entering device 132 is open.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which both the first hold information and the second hold information are easily obtained in the high probability state.

  It is to be noted that the first special ball entry device 131 and the second special ball entry device 132 are not limited to the configuration in which the first special ball entry device 132 is arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and the first special ball entry device 131 is formed by the same firing operation mode. Although it is possible to aim for a prize and a prize to the second special ball entry device 132, the first special ball entry device 131 and the second special ball entry device 132 have a laterally shifted positional relationship. May be provided. In this case, it is not necessary to adjust the period in which the first special ball-entering device 131 is in the open state and the period in which the second special ball-entering device 132 is in the open state in the high-probability state so as to be different from each other. Also, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which both the first hold information and the second hold information are easily obtained in the high probability state.

<Fourth Embodiment>
The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration that utilizes the playability and the prefetch result. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  First, the contents of the success / failure table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d).

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d), in the hit / fail result table, a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set as the hit results. The jackpot result is, as in the first embodiment, an opportunity result that can be a trigger for transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special power winning device 32 is controlled to be opened / closed, and can be a transition opportunity for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition for both the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode, while triggering the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electricity winning device 32 is controlled to open / close. The losing result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  The switching to the open / close execution mode will be performed in both the case of the jackpot result and the case of the small hit result as described above. The opening / closing mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 is different between the opening / closing execution mode executed when the winning result is obtained. More specifically, the opening / closing execution mode executed when a jackpot result is obtained is a round number regulation mode executed up to a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit similarly to the first embodiment. As described above, the round game is performed until one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined open continuation period elapses, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win the special electric prize winning device 32. It is a game that continues. In this case, the configuration in which the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled such that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds in a situation where the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player. In, the opening duration is set to 29 seconds and the upper limit is set to 10. Therefore, the open duration of the round game is set to a time longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, and the upper limit of the special prize winning device 32 in each round game is set. It can be expected that more game balls will win. In addition, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to 15 rounds regardless of which jackpot result is obtained.

  In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is obtained, the round game is not set, the number of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 is the upper limit number, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls is The mode is an opening / closing number regulation mode that ends when one of the conditions for winning the special electricity prize device 32 is satisfied. The opening duration of the special power winning device 32 in the opening / closing number regulation mode is longer than the firing cycle of game balls (specifically, 0.6 seconds), and the firing cycle of game balls and the upper limit number (specifically, 10 pieces). Is set to the opening / closing number regulation period shorter than the product of In this pachinko machine 10, since the number of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 in the number-of-opening-and-closing mode is set to one, the one open continuation period is set to the above-mentioned period for opening and closing number. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the number of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 in the number of opening / closing mode is set to a plurality of times, the total period of the plurality of opening continuation periods is the above-mentioned number of opening / closing number. A configuration in which the service period is set may be used. Specifically, the opening / closing number regulation period is set to 1.8 seconds. In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit results, the number of balls held by the player can be increased although the number is smaller than in the opening / closing execution mode executed when the large hit results.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (d), the first special map used for determining whether the first hold information stored in the first special figure execution area 127a is correct or not, as shown in FIGS. And a second special figure permission table used for determining whether the second hold information stored in the second special figure execution area 127b is valid. Further, the first special figure success / failure table includes a low-accuracy acceptance table and a high-accuracy acceptance table. Similarly, the second special figure success / failure table also includes a low-probability acceptance table and a high-accuracy table. There is a success / failure table. That is, the pachinko machine 10 refers to different winning / failing tables in the first holding information and the second holding information, and in any case, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are used as the success / absence lottery mode in the success / failure determination. Existing.

  More specifically, each of the winning / failing tables will be described. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the low probability winning / failing table for the first special map has two random number values (for example, “5”, “305”) as a jackpot result. )), And the others are the values of the random numbers resulting in the outliers. That is, when the winning / losing determination mode is set to the low probability mode and the winning / losing determination is performed on the first hold information, the winning result may be either the big hit result or the miss result, but the small hit result is not obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot result is set larger in the high likelihood determination table for the first special figure than in the case of the low likelihood determination table for the first special figure. Specifically, the number is 20 (for example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”, “245”, “276”, “305”). , "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the situation in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins in the situation in the high probability mode. Other values of the random numbers are the values of the random numbers resulting in the deviation. That is, when the winning / losing determination mode is set to the high probability mode and the winning / losing determination is performed on the first hold information, any one of the big hit result and the miss result is not a small hit result.

  As shown in FIG. 32C, the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot is the same as that of the first low-probability table for the first special figure. On the other hand, the value of the random number other than the random number that results in the big hit is the value of the random number that results in the small hit. In other words, when the hit determination process is performed on the second hold information in the hit / reject lottery mode in the low probability mode, the result is either the big hit result or the small hit result. However, although the details will be described later, a situation may occur in which the second suspension information is a trigger for starting the game round but the hit / fail determination processing is not performed on the second suspension information. Information is treated as an outlier.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (d), the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot is the same as that of the high probability determination table for the first special figure in the high probability determination table for the second special figure. Therefore, the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot result is larger than that in the case of the low probability table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the value of the random number other than the random number that results in the big hit is the value of the random number that results in the small hit. That is, when the winning / rejecting determination is performed on the second hold information in the winning / rejecting lottery mode in the high probability mode, the result is either the big hit result or the small hit result. However, although the details will be described later, a situation may occur in which the second suspension information is a trigger for starting the game round but the hit / fail determination processing is not performed on the second suspension information. Information is treated as an outlier.

  As described above, when the second hold information triggers the determination of the success or failure, a small hit result can be generated. Open / close execution mode is likely to occur. Then, the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result allows the player to slightly increase the number of balls held.

  If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than the low probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  In the configuration in which the contents of the hit / fail table are different between the first hold information and the second hold information as described above, the contents of the distribution table are similar to the first hold information and the second hold information as in the first embodiment. It is the same as the information. In the first embodiment, two types of support modes, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode, are used. However, in the present embodiment, only one type of support mode is provided. Therefore, the probability of the winning in the ordinary power open state in the ordinary power opening lottery process using the ordinary number random number counter C4 and the manner of determining the variable display period in the case where the variable display of the pattern is performed on the general figure display unit 38a are as follows. It is constant irrespective of the game state, and the number of times the general electric role product 34a is opened in the general electric open state, one open period of the general electric role product 34a, and In the case where the open state occurs a plurality of times, the execution mode of the drive control of the general purpose duty object 34a such as the closed period from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state is also constant regardless of the game state. It is. Accordingly, it is not necessary to change the display control mode of the general-purpose display unit 38a and the drive control mode of the general-purpose electrical component 34a according to the type of the support mode. And the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, since there is only one type of support mode, the normal gaming state in the present embodiment is a gaming state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the high probability state in the present embodiment is a gaming state in which the winning / rejecting lottery mode is a high probability. It is a game state that is a mode.

  In the first embodiment, the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d are provided in the second special figure holding area 126, and a plurality of second holding information can be held and stored. In the embodiment, the number of the second reservation information that can be stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 is one. The opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game time in one of the special figure display portions 37a and 37b is executed in a case where the game time is not being executed in the second special figure display portion 37b. In the case where a prize does not occur in the second operating port 34 when the situation is not the situation, the second reservation information is directly stored in the second special figure reservation area 126, and the game time is executed in the second special figure display unit 37b. The second hold information is not acquired even if a prize occurs in the second operating port 34 in a situation in which the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the number of games in any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is executed. . Accordingly, in a situation where the game turn on the second special figure display unit 37b can be started, the player who wants to start the game turn on the second special figure display unit 37b moves to the second operating port 34 each time. It is necessary to perform a firing operation aiming at the prize.

  In the configuration in which the type of the support mode is only one, the setting mode of the duration of the game times is different between the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, so that the second mode is set in the normal game state. The execution frequency of the game times on the special figure display unit 37b is lower than the execution frequency of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a. Hereinafter, a setting mode of the duration of the game times will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  In the normal game state, the setting mode of the duration of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a is the normal setting mode. In the normal setting mode, as shown in FIG. 33, if the result of the hit / fail judgment processing is a departure result and a complete departure where a reach effect does not occur, the upper limit number (specifically, When a new game round is started in a situation where the first hold information is stored (4 pieces), 2 seconds is selected as the duration of the game round, and the upper limit number is set in the first special figure holding area 125. If a new game time is started in a situation where the first hold information is not stored, any one of 10 seconds, 20 seconds and 30 seconds is selected as the duration of the game time. Also, in the normal setting mode, if the result of the hit / fail judgment processing is an out-of-match result, but the out-of-reach time at which a reach effect occurs, or if the result of the hit / fail judgment processing is a jackpot result, the game Is selected from among 20 seconds, 30 seconds, 40 seconds, 50 seconds, 1 minute, 1 minute 30 seconds, and 2 minutes. In this case, it is easier to select a duration that is longer at the time of the jackpot than at the time of the off-reach, and the average duration selected is also longer at the time of the jackpot than at the off-reach.

  On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, the setting mode of the duration of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b is a long-term setting mode. In the long-term setting mode, the duration of the selected game time is only one type, and the duration of the one type of game time is irrespective of the result of the determination as to whether or not the target game is appropriate. Is selected. The duration of the selected game time is 10 minutes. The variable display period is longer than two minutes, which is the duration of the longest game cycle selected in the normal selection mode. Thereby, in the normal gaming state, the execution frequency of the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b becomes lower than the execution frequency of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a.

  In the high probability state, the setting mode of the duration of the game times is different from that in the normal game state. Specifically, in the high probability state, the duration of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a is one type regardless of whether or not a reach effect occurs when the result of the hit determination process is a result of being out. Only one type is to be selected, and only one type is to be selected even when the result of the hit / fail determination processing is a jackpot result. In this case, the duration of the game round in the case of a jackpot result is set to be longer than the duration of the game round in the case of a miss result, and specifically, the duration of the game round in the case of a miss result The duration of the game times in the case of a jackpot result being 10 seconds is 30 seconds.

  In the high probability state, the duration of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b is determined when the result of the hit determination processing is a small hit result or the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the big hit result. In the case where the second hold information is a trigger for starting the game in the situation where the second hold information is executed and the second hold information is treated as a departure result, only one type is selected, and the result of the hit / fail judgment processing is a jackpot result. , Only one type can be selected. Specifically, the duration of the game round in the case of a small hit result or the case of being treated as a miss result is 1 second, whereas the duration of the game round in the case of a big hit result is 1 minute 30 seconds. Has become.

  Here, in the high probability state, the continuation period of the game times selected by the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit results is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the large hit results in the high probability state. Is set to a period shorter than the duration of the game selected in the game. In the high probability state, the duration of the game times selected by the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit results is the game times triggered by the first hold information in the high probability state. It is set to a period shorter than the continuation period of the selected game time, and furthermore, in the normal game state, the continuation of any game time that can be selected in the game time triggered by the first hold information or the second hold information The period is set to be shorter than the period. That is, in the high probability state, the duration of the game round selected by the game cycle triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result is shorter than the duration of the game cycle in any other case. Is set. As a result, in the high probability state, it is possible to shorten the digestion period of the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result, and to generate the opening / closing execution mode per unit time triggered by the small hit result. The number of times can be increased.

  On the other hand, in the high probability state, the duration of the game times selected in the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit results in the high probability state. In the high probability state, the first hold information is set not only to be longer than the duration of the game round selected by the game round but also to be longer than the duration of the game round selected by the game round. Have been. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that a jackpot result occurs in the game round triggered by the second hold information.

  Next, how the game progresses in each of the normal game state and the high probability state will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 34A shows a period in the high probability state, FIG. 34B shows a continuation period of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a, and FIG. 34C shows a second special figure display. FIG. 34 (d) shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, and FIG. 34 (e) shows the execution of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result. Indicates the period.

  In the normal gaming state, as described above, the setting mode of the continuation period of the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b is the long-term setting mode. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), a plurality of game times are started in the first special figure display unit 37a including each of the timing of t1, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, the timing of t5 and the timing of t7. Meanwhile, in the second special figure display unit 37b, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), only one game time is executed from the timing t2 to the timing t6. Thus, in the normal gaming state, the execution frequency of the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a is higher than the execution frequency of the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a started at the timing of t7 end at the timing of t8. In this case, since the first hold information that triggered the start of the game round corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result, the jackpot result is displayed at the timing t8 when the game round ends, as shown in FIG. The opening / closing execution mode triggered is started. Then, the open / close execution mode ends at the timing of t9. As described above, since the jackpot result that triggered the opening / closing execution mode is a highly-accurate jackpot result, the gaming state shifts to the high probability state at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. Further, the first reservation information is reserved and stored in the first special map reservation area 125 at the timing of t9, and the second reservation information is reserved and stored in the second special map reservation area 126. As shown in FIG. 34 (b), the game turn on the first special figure display unit 37a is started, and the game turn on the second special figure display unit 37b is started as shown in FIG. 34 (c).

  The game time in the first special figure display unit 37a started at the timing of t9 continues until the timing of t17 as shown in FIG. 34B, but during the timing of t9 to the timing of t17, The game times in the second special figure display section 37b are executed a plurality of times, and after each game time, an opening / closing execution mode is generated triggered by the small hit result. That is, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are executed such as the timing from t9 to t10, the timing from t12 to t13, and the timing from t15 to t16. At the same time, since each of the game times is triggered by the second suspension information corresponding to the small hit result, as shown in FIG. 34 (d), the timing from t10 to t11, the timing from t13 to t14, and the timing from t16 The opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, such as the timing from timing to t18, is executed. In this case, the duration of the game times of the first special figure display unit 37a that results in a departure in the high probability state is set to 10 seconds, whereas the second special figure that results in a small hit in the high probability state is set. The duration of the game times on the display unit 37b is set to 1 second, and the duration of the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is set to 1.8 seconds. Therefore, in the high probability state, while the game time of the first special figure display unit 37a that results in the departure is executed once, the game time and the small hit result of the second special figure display unit 37b that becomes the small hit result , The combination of the open / close execution modes can occur three to four times.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (d), at the timing of t10, the timing of t13, and the timing of t16, which are situations in which the game is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a as shown in FIG. 34 (b). Then, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is started. Thereby, compared to the configuration in which the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is started after waiting for the game round in the first special figure display unit 37a to end, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is performed. It is possible to increase the execution frequency per unit time.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), a game round in the first special figure display unit 37a is newly started. Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (c), at the timing of t20, which is the situation in which the game time is being executed, the game time in the second special figure display section 37b is started and the game time is ended at time t21. Then, the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is started as shown in FIG. The open / close execution mode ends at the timing of t22.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t23, which is a situation in which the number of games in the first special figure display section 37a started at the timing of t19 is continued, as shown in FIG. The times are started. The game times are triggered by the second suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result. Thereafter, at the timing of t24, the game round in the first special figure display section 37a is completed as shown in FIG. 34B, and at the subsequent timing of t25, the second special figure is displayed as shown in FIG. The game round on the diagram display section 37b is ended. Then, at the timing of the t25, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is started as shown in FIG.

  Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration that enables the progress of the game as described above. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a first special figure special power control process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82, and FIG. 36 is a second special figure special power control process in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. It is a flowchart which shows. The first special figure special power control processing is executed in step S214 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9), and the second special figure special electric power control processing is executed in step S215 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 9).

  In the first special map special power control process (FIG. 35), first, a process of acquiring first hold information is executed (step S1701). In the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 36), first, the processing of acquiring the second hold information is executed (step S1801).

  In the process of acquiring the first hold information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 37A, a prize has occurred in the first operating port 33 (step S1901: YES). If the number of the stored first hold information is less than the upper limit storage number (step S1902: YES), the same as step S503 and step S504 in the first embodiment, the process proceeds to step S1903 and step S1904. 1) Execute a process for acquiring the hold information. After that, a process of selecting a hold command is executed (step S1905). Although details will be described later in the pending command selection process, a process for selecting a first pending command corresponding to the content of the first pending information acquired this time is executed. Then, the first hold command selected in step S1905 is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 (step S1906). The sound-light-side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display-side MPU 103, so that the number of the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 is reduced. Is changed according to the increase in the number of holdings.

  In the acquisition process of the second hold information, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 37 (b), the second special figure display unit 37b is not in a situation where a game round is being executed, and any special figure display is performed. This is not the case where the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the number of games in the units 37a and 37b is being executed (step S2001: NO), and the case where a prize has been generated in the second operating port 34 (step S2002). : YES), and proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, the respective values of the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the second special figure reservation area 126. As a result, the second suspension information is stored in the second special figure suspension area 126. The acquired second suspension information immediately triggers the start of the game round in the second special figure display unit 37b.

  Returning to the description of the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 35) and the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 36), after the execution of the hold information acquisition processing (step S1701 or step S1801), the first By executing the same processing as steps S302 to S304 and steps S402 to S404 in the embodiment in each of steps S1702 to S1704 and S1802 to S1804, the value corresponding to the value of the corresponding special figure special power counter is obtained. Jump to processing. In this case, in the first special figure special power control processing, if the value of the first special figure special power counter is “0”, the special figure fluctuation start processing (step S1705) is executed, and the first special figure special power counter is executed. Is "1", the special figure changing process (step S1706) is to be executed, and if the value of the first special figure special power counter is "2", the special figure fixing process (step S1707). ) Is to be executed, and when the value of the first special figure special power counter is “3”, the special power start processing (step S1708) is to be executed, and when the value of the first special figure special power counter is “4”. The special toll opening process (step S1709) is to be executed, and if the value of the first special toll power counter is "5", the toll closing process (step S1710) is to be executed, and the first toll toll is executed. If the counter value is " Electrically movable device control end process (step S1711) is executed if a ". In the second special figure special power control processing, when the value of the second special figure special power counter is “0”, the special figure change start processing (step S1805) is to be executed, and the value of the second special figure special power counter is set. Is "1", the special figure changing process (step S1806) is to be executed, and if the value of the second special figure special power counter is "2", the special figure fixing process (step S1807) is performed. When the value of the second special figure special power counter is “3”, the special power start processing (step S1808) is performed, and when the value of the second special figure special power counter is “4”, The special toll opening process (step S1809) is to be executed, and if the value of the second special toll special power counter is “5”, the toll closing process (step S1810) is to be executed, and If the value is "6" It becomes the execution target electrically movable device control end process (step S1811). If that, processing small hit (step S1812) is executed when the value of the second special electrically movable device control counter is "7".

  Among the above-described processes, the special figure changing process (steps S1706 and S1806), the special power opening process (steps S1709 and S1809), and the special power closing process (steps S1710 and S1810) are the same as in the first embodiment. The description is omitted because they are the same. Processing other than these will be described below.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special figure change start processing executed in step S1705 in the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 35) and in step S1805 in the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 36).

  In the special figure change start processing, first, it is determined whether or not the processing for the big hit state is executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special power control processing (FIGS. 35 and 36) (step S2101). As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, even if the game play is being executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game play can be executed on the other. In this case, step S2101 is executed, and if the processing for the big hit state is executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special power control processing (FIGS. 35 and 36), the processing from step S2102 is executed. The start of a new game round is regulated without any change. Thereby, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is being executed in response to the game time of the jackpot result in one of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b, the game time in the other newly starts. It is regulated not to be. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, if this time is the special figure fluctuation start processing in the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 36), it is determined whether the value of the first special figure special power counter is any one of “3” to “6”. If the judgment is made in step S2101, and if it is any of "3" to "6", the processing after step S2102 is not executed. Thus, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the game time corresponding to the jackpot result in the first special figure display unit 37a, a new game time is not started in the second special figure display unit 37b.

  On the other hand, if this time is the special figure variation start processing in the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 35), it is determined whether the value of the second special figure special power counter is any of “3” to “6”. If it is determined in S2101 that the value is any one of "3" to "6", the processing after step S2102 is not executed, whereas if the value of the second special figure special power counter is "7", Executes the processing after step S2102. When the value of the second special figure special power counter is "7", the small hitting process (step S1812) is executed as described above, and the small hitting process will be described in detail later. A process for controlling execution of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed. That is, the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a are not started in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game time corresponding to the jackpot result in the second special figure display unit 37b is being executed, but the second special figure display unit 37b is not started. The process is started in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the number of games corresponding to the small hit result on the diagram display unit 37b. This makes it possible to increase the execution frequency of the game times in the first special figure display unit 37a.

  Incidentally, the shortest period of the continuation period of the game times executed in the first special figure display unit 37a is set to a period longer than the longest period required until the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result ends. I have. Therefore, even if a game round is started in the first special figure display unit 37a in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the game round is not opened / closed by the small hit result. Exit after exiting mode.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined whether the corresponding suspended number is one or more (step S2102). If this time is the special figure change start processing in the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 35), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of first reservation information are stored in the first special figure reservation area 125, and this time In the case of the special figure change start processing in the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 36), it is determined whether or not one or more pieces of second reservation information are stored in the second special figure reservation area 126. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, data setting processing is executed (step S2103). If this time is the special figure change start processing in the first special figure special electric power control processing (FIG. 35), the processing content of the data setting processing is the same as that in step S703 in the first embodiment. If this time is the special figure change start processing in the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 36), the data setting processing is shifted to the execution area 127b for the second special figure stored in the second special figure reservation area 126. Later, the second special figure reservation area 126 is cleared to “0”.

  After executing the data setting process, the game times are executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special electric power control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) as in step S704 in the first embodiment, and the game is executed. It is determined whether or not the hold information that triggered the start of the round corresponds to the jackpot result (step S2104). If a negative determination is made in step S2104, a hit / fail determination process is executed (step S2105).

  In the success / failure determination process, if the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start of the game round is the first special figure display unit 37a, the low probability correctness table for the first special figure (see FIG. 32A) is displayed. If the winning / rejection lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first special-figure display unit 37a, a high-accuracy winning / rejecting table for the first special-figure (see FIG. 32B) Is read from the main ROM 83, and if the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start of the game round is the second special figure display unit 37b, a low probability correctness table for the second special figure (see FIG. 32 (c)) ) Is read from the main-side ROM 83, and if the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start of the game round is the second special figure display unit 37b, a high-accuracy winning / failing table for the second special figure (FIG. 32D) ) From the main ROM 83. After reading the hit / fail table, the hit / fail determination is performed based on the hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure which is the start target of the current game round. , That is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1, and it is determined whether the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the hit / fail table. In addition, if the start target of the current game round is the second special figure display unit 37b, if the numerical information set as the big hit result does not match, the small hit result is set in the hit / fail table. It is determined whether or not any of the numerical information matches.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S2106: YES), the processes of steps S2107 to S2109 are executed in the same manner as steps S707 to S709 in the first embodiment. When the result of the hit determination processing is not a big hit result but a small hit result (step S2106: NO, step S2110: YES), the small hit flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S2111). As described above, the small hit result does not occur on the first special figure display unit 37a side, but occurs only on the second special figure display unit 37b side. Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step S2112). Specifically, the information on the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display unit 37b in the current game round is specified from the stop result table for the small hit result stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. Then, the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step S2110: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S2113). Specifically, in the current game round, the information of the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. From the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the small hit result. One type is common to the special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b.

  In addition, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2104, that is, when the game time is being executed on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special power control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) and the game time is started, the hold is performed. If the information corresponds to the jackpot result, the stop result setting process for the miss result described above is executed without executing the hit / fail judgment process (step S2113). In other words, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which even if the game time is being executed on one of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b, the game time can be started on the other. However, if the pending information that triggered the start of the game round that has already been executed corresponds to any of the jackpot results, the newly executed game round will have the hold information that triggered the start. Regardless of whether it corresponds to the jackpot result or not, it becomes the game time corresponding to the off result. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game times corresponding to the jackpot results from being repeatedly executed. Also, in the case where the start of a new game round is prevented if the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed, the hold information that is the start target of the game round has been acquired. Regardless, at the point when a new game round is not started, it may become clear that the currently executed game round is the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, but the game round corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed Even if it has been done, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring by adopting a configuration in which a new game round can be started.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, even in the situation where the game time is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the pachinko machine 10 is opened and closed by the game time of the small hit result on the second special figure display unit 37b. Execution mode may be started. In this case, in the situation where the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed in the first special figure display unit 37a, even if the second hold information corresponding to the small jackpot result is a trigger for starting the game round. The game time triggered by the second suspension information is a miss result. Thus, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result can be prevented from being started while the game corresponding to the big hit result is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a. . In addition to this configuration, as described above, the shortest period of the continuation period of the game times executed on the first special figure display unit 37a is the longest time required for ending the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result. Since the period is set to be longer than the period, even if the game time is started on the first special figure display unit 37a in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the game time is not The process ends after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result ends. Therefore, the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result in the first special figure display unit 37a should be executed and the situation in which the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result in the special figure display unit 37b should be executed overlap. Can be prevented from occurring. Also, by executing the processing in step S2104, the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result in the first special figure display unit 37a and the special figure display unit 37b, as in the first embodiment. And the situation in which the open / close execution mode should be executed triggered by the jackpot result does not occur repeatedly. That is, the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game time in the first special figure display unit 37a should be executed and the situation in which the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game time in the second special figure display unit 37b should be executed overlap. This is a configuration that does not occur.

  When the processing in step S2109, step S2112, or step S2113 is performed, the processing for specifying the variable display period is performed (step S2114). FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the process of specifying the variable display period. In the process of specifying the variable display period, first, it is determined whether or not the suspension information to be started this time is the first suspension information and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state (step S2201). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, a lottery process for a variable display period is executed (step S2202). In the lottery process in the variable display period, the same process as in steps S802 to S804 in the first embodiment is executed. Thereby, as described above, the duration of the game times is selected in the normal setting mode, and the period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the duration of the game times is set as the variable display period.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2201, a reading process for the variable display period is executed (step S2203). In the reading process, if the hold information to be started this time is the first hold information and the current gaming state is a high probability state, 10 seconds if the result of the hit / fail determination processing is a miss result Is read from the main ROM 83, and if the result of the hit / fail judgment processing is a jackpot result, information of 30 seconds is read from the main ROM 83. Then, a period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the continuation period of the read game times is set as a variable display period. In this case, if the result is a departure, no reach effect occurs in the decoration area 43 and the first individual display area 45 of the symbol display device 41, and if the result is a jackpot, the decoration area of the symbol display device 41 does not occur. A reach effect occurs in 43 and the first individual display area 45. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even in the case of a departure result, a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a reach effect is executed by the main MPU 82 or the sound-side MPU 93, and the reach effect is determined. If it becomes, a configuration in which a reach effect occurs may be adopted.

  In the reading process of the variable display period, if the hold information to be started this time is the second hold information and the current gaming state is the high probability state, the result of the hit / fail determination processing is a small hit result. Alternatively, when the second hold information is treated as a departure result, information of one second is read from the main ROM 83, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment processing is a jackpot result, information of one minute and thirty seconds is read from the main ROM 83. . Then, a period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the continuation period of the read game times is set as a variable display period. In this case, in the case of the small hit result, no reach effect occurs in the decoration area 43 and the first individual display area 45 of the symbol display device 41, and in the case of the big hit result, the decoration of the symbol display device 41. A reach effect occurs in the area 43 and the first individual display area 45. When the duration of the game is different from one second, the symbol variation display in each of the regions 43 to 45 and 47 of the symbol display device 41 is sequentially stopped in the order of left → right → middle. On the other hand, when the duration of the game time is 1 second, the variable display of the symbols G11 to G13 is simultaneously stopped and displayed in the second individual display area 47 of the symbol display device 41, and the symbols G11 to G11 at that time are displayed. The combination of G13 is a combination corresponding to the small hit result (for example, “3.4.1”). This makes it possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the small hit result has occurred, even if the duration of the game round in the case of the small hit result is shorter than in other cases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display of symbols is sequentially stopped even in the case of a small hit result.

  In the reading process of the variable display period, if the hold information to be started this time is the second hold information and the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the result of the hit / fail determination processing is any result. Also reads 10 minutes of information from the main ROM 83. Then, a period obtained by subtracting the final stop period from the continuation period of the read game times is set as a variable display period. In this case, when the result of the hit determination processing is a jackpot result, the elapsed time of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is the game round when the first hold information is the start trigger in the normal gaming state. When 9 minutes, which is a reference period longer than the maximum continuation period that can be selected in, is reached, the reach effect is started in the additional decoration area 44 of the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination processing is the small hit result, the reach effect does not occur in the additional decoration area 44 of the symbol display device 41.

  After executing the processing of step S2202 or step S2203, the information of the variable display period specified in any of these processings is set in the special figure special power timer counter provided in the main RAM 84 (step S2204). As a result, the setting of the variable display period of the game to be started this time is completed.

  Returning to the description of the special figure change start process (FIG. 38), after executing the process of specifying the change display period, the processes of steps S2115 to S2117 are executed in the same manner as steps S712 to S714 in the first embodiment. I do. Thereby, a new game round is started.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the special figure finalizing process executed in step S1707 in the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 35) and in step S1807 in the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 36).

  First, it is determined whether the final suspension period has elapsed (step S2301). If the final suspension period has elapsed (step S2301: YES), it is determined whether or not an opportunity has occurred to shift the gaming state from the high probability state to the normal gaming state, and if the opportunity has occurred. Executes a process for shifting the gaming state to the normal gaming state (steps S2302 to S2305). This processing will be described later.

  If the process of steps S2302 to S2305 is executed and the current game time is the game time corresponding to the jackpot result (step S2306: YES), the current process is the first special figure special power control process (FIG. 35), the value of the first special figure special power counter is incremented by 1. If the current process corresponds to the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 36), the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 36) is performed. The value of the special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S2307). Since the value of the special figure special power counter in the case where the special figure special determination processing is executed is “2”, the value of the special figure special power counter targeted for addition by adding 1 is the special power start processing (step S1708). , Step S1808).

  When the processing of steps S2302 to S2305 is executed, and the current game time is the game time in the second special figure display unit 37b and the game time corresponding to the small hit result (step S2308: YES) Then, 5 is added to the value of the second special figure special power counter (step S2309). Since the value of the second special figure special power counter in the case where the special figure special processing is executed is “2”, the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by 5 so that the value of the second special figure special power counter is a small hit processing (step S1812). Becomes "7" corresponding to.

  If the process of steps S2302 to S2305 is executed and the current game time is a game time that does not correspond to either the big hit result or the small hit result (step S2308: NO), the current process is the first process If it corresponds to the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 35), the value of the first special figure special power counter is cleared to "0", and this processing corresponds to the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 36). If so, the value of the second special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S2310). Thus, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start processing (step S1705, step S1805).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the special power starting process executed in step S1708 in the first special power special control process (FIG. 35) and in step S1808 in the second special power special control process (FIG. 36).

  If it is before the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result (step S2401: YES), the value of the special figure special power counter on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special power control processing (FIGS. 35 and 36) Is determined to be "0", so that the game times are executed in the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the side not corresponding to the current special figure special power control process (FIGS. 35 and 36). It is determined whether or not the situation is present (step S2402). When the value of the special figure special power counter that does not correspond to the current special figure special power control processing (FIGS. 35 and 36) is not “0” (step S2402: NO), this special figure special determination finalizing processing is ended as it is. Does not execute the process for starting the open / close execution mode. Thereby, the special figure display on the side where the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed in a situation where the game round is being executed on both the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. When the game round in the units 37a and 37b ends first, the open / close execution mode is started after the game round in the special figure display units 37a and 37b on the side where the game round has not ended yet. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the currently executed game time from being forcibly ended upon the end of the game time corresponding to the jackpot result, and even though the game time is being executed. It is possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode from being started.

  Incidentally, as described above, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode is executed with the game time corresponding to the jackpot result in one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b as a trigger, the game time in the other is used. Is a configuration that is not newly started. By providing this configuration and the configuration of step S2402, the game round is not executed in the situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the result of the game round in the situation where the game round is being executed, and to make the player pay attention to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation where the open / close execution mode is being executed. Becomes

  If the value of the special figure special power counter that does not correspond to the current special figure special power control process (FIGS. 35 and 36) is “0” (step S2402: YES), information corresponding to the opening period corresponding to the jackpot result (Specifically, 10 seconds) is set in the special figure special power timer counter corresponding to the special figure display units 37a and 37b that triggered the current open / close execution mode (step S2403). After that, an opening command is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 (step S2404). Thus, an effect corresponding to the opening period is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

  When the opening period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result has been started (step S2401: NO), the opening / closing triggered by the jackpot result is performed on condition that the opening period has elapsed (step S2405: YES). A process for starting the execution mode is executed. Specifically, first, a round number setting process is executed (step S2406). In the setting process, “15” is set in the round counter RC provided in the main RAM 84. The round counter RC is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the remaining number of round games to be executed. After that, the information of the round game opening continuation period (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the special figure special electric timer counter to be controlled (step S2407), and one round is set in the prize counter provided in the main RAM 84. Information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the maximum winning number in the special power winning device 32 in the game is set (step S2408). Then, a special power release setting process is executed (step S2409). In the opening setting process, data setting for setting the special power winning device 32 to an open state is performed. Thereby, the special power winning device 32 is in an open state. Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 35), the value of the first special figure special power counter is incremented by 1, and the current processing is the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 35). 36), the value of the second special figure special power counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special power special start processing is executed is “3”, the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by adding 1 is the special power special opening processing (step S1709, It becomes "4" corresponding to step S1809).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the special power ending process executed in step S1711 in the first special power special power control process (FIG. 35) and in step S1811 in the second special power special control process (FIG. 36).

  If the ending period set in the special power opening process (step S1709, step S1809) has elapsed (step S2501: YES), a game state setting process is executed. In the game state setting process, if “1” is set in the first high-accuracy jackpot flag or the second high-accuracy jackpot flag of the main-side RAM 84 (step S2502: YES), the current open / close execution mode starts. In order to mean that the jackpot result that triggered the event is a high-accuracy jackpot result, the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 84 is set to “1” (step S2503), and the game provided in the main RAM 84 is set. “60” is set in the number counter (step S2504).

  The high-probability flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, after the open / close execution mode triggered by the high-accuracy jackpot result is completed, the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is not generated, and the reference number of terminations (specifically, 60). When the game times are executed, the game state is shifted from the high probability state to the normal game state. The number-of-games counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of end reference times by the main MPU 82.

  Here, a process for specifying an opportunity to shift the gaming state from the high probability state to the normal gaming state is executed in steps S2302 to S2305 of the special figure fixing process (FIG. 40). Specifically, when the final stop period of the current game has elapsed (step S2301: YES), if the value of the game number counter is 1 or more (step S2302: YES), the value of the game number counter is set to 1 Subtraction is performed (step S2303). Then, when the value of the game number counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S2304: YES), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to “0” (step S2305). Thereby, the game state shifts from the high probability state to the normal game state.

  Returning to the description of the special power ending process (FIG. 42), if the jackpot result that has started the opening / closing execution mode this time is a low-probability jackpot result (step S2502: NO), the high-probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to “0”. Is cleared (step S2505), and the number-of-games counter of the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0" (step S2506). Thereby, the game state after the current open / close execution mode becomes the normal game state.

  When the processing of step S2504 or step S2506 has been executed, a clear processing is executed (step S2507). Thereby, the flag in which “1” is set to “1” among the first high-accuracy jackpot flag, the second high-accuracy jackpot flag, and the second low-accuracy jackpot flag in the main RAM 84 is cleared to “0”. At the same time, various flags and various counters used in the current open / close execution mode are cleared to “0”.

  Thereafter, if the current processing corresponds to the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 35), the value of the first special figure special power control counter is cleared to "0", and the current processing is the second special figure special power control. If it corresponds to the process (FIG. 36), the value of the second special figure special power counter is cleared to "0". Thus, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start processing (step S1705, step S1805).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the small hitting process executed in step S1812 in the second special figure special power control process (FIG. 43).

  If the current processing time is the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result (step S2601: YES), the information of the opening continuation period of the opening / closing number prescribed mode is stored in the second special figure special power timer counter (specifically, Is set to 1.8 seconds) (step S2602), and information (specifically, "10") corresponding to the upper limit winning number to the special power winning device 32 in the opening / closing number regulation mode is set in the winning counter of the main RAM 84. It is set (step S2603). Then, a special power release setting process is executed (step S2604). In the opening setting process, data setting for setting the special power winning device 32 to an open state is performed. Thereby, the special power winning device 32 is in an open state.

  If the current processing time is not the start timing of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result (step S2601: NO), on condition that a prize has occurred in the special power prize device 32 (step S2605: YES). Then, the value of the winning counter in the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S2606). Then, if the value of the winning counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S2607: YES), a process for terminating the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed. In addition, even if the winning in the special power winning device 32 has not occurred (step S2605: NO) or the value of the winning counter of the main RAM 84 is not “0” (step S2607: NO), the second Even when the value of the special figure special power timer counter is "0" and the opening continuation period of the opening / closing number prescribed mode has elapsed (step S2608: YES), the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is ended. Execute the process for causing

  In the process for terminating the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result, first, a special power closing setting process is executed (step S2609). In the closing setting process, data setting for setting the special power winning device 32 to be in a closed state is performed. As a result, the special electric winning device 32 is closed. Then, after clearing the small hit flag of the main RAM 84 to "0" (step S2610), the value of the second special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S2611). As a result, the value of the second special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start processing (step S1805).

  Next, a description will be given of a configuration for executing various types of notification using prefetching of the hold information.

  As described above, if the second hold information is not subjected to the jackpot result when the second hold information is the target of the hit / fail judgment processing, the small hit result is obtained. By shifting to a certain opening / closing execution mode, a prize to the special power prize winning device 32 may occur. In addition, even if the game time is being executed on one of the first special figure display portion 37a and the second special figure display portion 37b, the game time can be started on the other, and the game state Is in the high probability state, the duration of the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result is 1 second which is the shortest period, and furthermore, the opening and closing execution mode of the opening and closing number regulation mode Is started even in the situation where the game round in the first special figure display section 37a is being executed. As a result, in the high probability state, the opening / closing execution mode of the opening / closing number prescribed mode is repeated in a short period of time. Will increase the number of game balls possessed.

  In this case, the high-probability state ends when the game has been executed 60 times, which is the end reference number, without generating a jackpot result. Then, if a jackpot result occurs in the middle of the high-probability state, the number of game turns in the second special figure display unit 37b is increased before the game turn corresponding to the jackpot result starts, and the opening / closing number regulation is performed. It is advantageous for the player to generate more open / close execution modes of the mode. On the other hand, even if the hold information is a target of the jackpot determination process in the high probability state, even if the hold information is a target of the jackpot determination process in the low probability state, the hold information may not be a jackpot result. Then, in such a situation where the first hold information is acquired, if the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b are repeatedly generated and the number of executions of the game times in the high probability state is set as the end reference number, 1 The profit of the jackpot result triggered by the hold information will be lost. Therefore, in such a case, the game times triggered by the first hold information are executed when the number of executions of the game times in the high-probability state is the end reference number or immediately before that, It is possible to maximize the profit of the player.

  Under such circumstances, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the first hold information is newly acquired in the high probability state, it is determined whether or not the first hold information corresponds to the jackpot result at the acquired timing. Look ahead. Then, when it is specified that it corresponds to the jackpot result, the launch of the game ball is stopped in relation to the content of the first hold information and the remaining number of continuations in the high probability state. The notification or the notification for prompting the launch of the game ball is executed. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for executing such notification will be specifically described. Note that the pre-reading as described above is not performed on the second suspension information.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a process of selecting a hold command executed by the main MPU 82. The process of selecting a hold command is executed in step S1905 in the process of acquiring the first hold information (FIG. 37).

  First, it is determined whether the first suspension information acquired this time is suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S2701). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the first reservation information acquired this time, and the numerical information is referred to in the high probability state. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the table. That is, whether the current game state is the normal game state or the high probability state is referred to the high-probability table. As described above, all types of numerical information that result in a large hit in the low probability table are included in the types of numerical information that result in a large hit in the high probability table. In this case, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the first hold information acquired this time corresponds to the normal game state and the high-accuracy state by determining whether or not the first jackpot information corresponds to the jackpot result with reference to the first special map high-accuracy determination table. This means that it is determined whether or not any of the probability states corresponds to the jackpot result.

  If the acquired first suspension information is suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S2701: YES), the first suspension information acquired this time among the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure suspension area 125. Is set to the jackpot holding flag provided in the area where is stored (step S2702). In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special map reservation area 125 have a winning random number area, a jackpot type area, and a reach random number area. A jackpot hold flag is provided separately, but unlike the first embodiment, the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d are not provided with a continuation period area and a set flag.

  Thereafter, under the condition that the current gaming state is the high probability state (step S2703: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of games in the first special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed (step S2703). Step S2704). If the game time of the first special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed (step S2704: YES), the prefetch notification is not executed. As described above, the hold information that triggers the start of the game round in the situation where the game round corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed is treated as corresponding to the missed result without performing the hit / fail determination processing. Therefore, in a situation where a game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been executed, even if a game round triggered by the second hold information is newly started, the game round is triggered by the game round. The profits made will not be guaranteed. In this case, as described above, during the execution of the game times of the first special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the jackpot result, the prefetch notification is not executed so that the firing of the game ball is stopped. (Hereinafter, also referred to as a notification corresponding to the pre-reading result) can be prevented from being executed in a meaningless manner.

  When the game time of the first special figure display unit 37a corresponding to the big hit result is not being executed (step S2704: NO), the big hit is held in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125. It is determined whether there are two or more areas in which the flag is set to “1” (step S2705). If there are two or more areas in which the jackpot hold flag is set to "1", the first hold information that is the starting opportunity of the game round corresponds to the jackpot result before the first hold information acquired this time. Means you are. In this case, there is a possibility that the notification corresponding to the pre-reading result has already been executed at the timing when the first hold information of the jackpot result which is the start timing of the game round is acquired. In such a situation, if the notification corresponding to the pre-read result is executed with the first hold information which is a trigger for starting the game later, the player may be confused. Further, even if the notification corresponding to the pre-reading result has not been executed for the first hold information of the jackpot result which is the trigger of the game round first, the first hold information of the jackpot result which triggers the start of the game round earlier Irrespective of this, if the notification corresponding to the pre-reading result is executed with the first hold information which is a trigger for starting the game later later, the notification corresponding to the pre-reading result having a content that does not match the current situation is executed. May be lost. On the other hand, when there are two or more areas in which the jackpot hold flag is set to "1", such inconvenience can be prevented by not executing the pre-reading notification. It becomes.

  If only one of the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d of the first special figure holding area 125 has the jackpot holding flag set to "1" (step S2705: NO), the large hit result is handled. This means that the first hold information to be performed is only the first hold information acquired this time. In this case, a process of enabling the prefetch notification in step S2706 and thereafter is executed.

  Specifically, first, the number of the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is grasped (step S2706). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the game number counter of the main RAM 84 is less than the reference number (step S2707). As described above, in the high probability state, the duration of the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the departure result is fixed to 10 seconds. In the high probability state, the duration of the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result is fixed at 1 second, and the opening / closing number regulation mode executed when the small hit result is obtained. The duration of the open / close execution mode is fixed at 1.8 seconds. Therefore, the duration of the game cycle (specifically, “10”) triggered by the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of pieces of the first hold information grasped in step S2706 and the first hold information corresponding to the out-of-offset result in the high probability state ) Is calculated, and if the game time is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the reference period is calculated by adding the remaining duration of the game time to the product result. Then, this reference period is defined as a continuation period (specifically, “1”) of the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result in the high probability state and an opening / closing execution mode in which the opening / closing number regulation mode is set. Divide by the result of the sum with the duration (specifically, “1.8”). If there is no remainder as a result of this division, and if the first special figure display unit 37a is executing a game round, the “quotient value based on the result of the above division” is displayed in the “first special figure holding area”. The result obtained by adding the "number of first hold information stored in 125" is set as a reference number, and unless the game number is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, "the quotient value based on the result of the above division" The result obtained by adding “the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of the first reservation information stored in the first special map reservation area 125” to the reference number is set as the reference number. On the other hand, when the remainder is generated as a result of the division, if the game number is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the “value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the quotient based on the result of the division” is set to “ The result obtained by adding "the number of the first reservation information stored in one special figure reservation area 125" is set as a reference number, and if the game number is not being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, "the result of the above division" The result obtained by adding "a value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the quotient according to" 1 "to" the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 "is set as a reference number. The first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b until the game number starts with the reference number calculated as described above and the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired this time as a trigger. This is the maximum number of games that can be started. The case where the value of the number-of-games counter of the main RAM 84 is less than the reference number means that the remaining number of times of the high-probability state starts the game number triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired this time. This means that the number of game times that can be started on the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b before the game is performed is less than the maximum number.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2707, it is determined whether the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired this time is the jackpot result that is a jackpot result regardless of the normal gaming state or the high probability state. A determination is made (step S2708). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the first reservation information acquired this time, and the numerical information is referred to in the normal gaming state. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the table. As described above, the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the low-accuracy table is included in the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the high-accuracy table. The hold information corresponding to the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the success / failure table becomes the jackpot result in any of the normal gaming state and the high probability state.

  If the first hold information acquired this time is the hold information that results in a jackpot regardless of the normal game state or the high-probability state, the first hold information does not serve as a trigger for starting the game in the high-probability state. Even so, a jackpot result will occur. Therefore, in such a case, by making an affirmative determination in step S2708 so that the processing in steps S2709 and S2710 is not performed, the remaining number of continuations in the high probability state corresponds to the jackpot result obtained this time. Even if it is less than or equal to the maximum number of game times of the second special figure display unit 37b that can be started by the time the game time triggered by the first hold information is started, the firing of the game ball is stopped. To prevent the notification from being performed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the notification for stopping the emission of the game balls from being executed in a situation where it is not necessary to stop the emission of the game balls.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2708, a process of calculating the number of times of notification is executed (step S2709). Specifically, if the game number is being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the value of the game number counter of the main RAM 84 is changed to the "first hold figure stored in the first special figure hold area 125". The value obtained by subtracting the "number of information" is calculated as the number of times of notification. If the game number is not being executed on the first special figure display unit 37a, the value of the game number counter of the main RAM 84 is changed to the value of the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125. The value obtained by subtracting "the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the number" is calculated as the number of times of notification.

  Thereafter, the hold command for notifying the number of times that the information of the calculated number of times of notification has been set is set as a first hold command to be transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 (step S2710). This first hold command is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 in step S1906 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 37A). The sound-light-side MPU 93, which will be described in detail later, receives a hold command for reporting the number of times as the first hold command, and sets the second special figure within the range of the number of times of notification set in the hold command for reporting the number of times. A notification indicating that the firing of the game ball should be stopped so that the execution of the game times is stopped on the display unit 37b is executed.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S2707 or an affirmative determination is made in step S2708, it is determined whether the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result obtained this time is the hold information that results in a low-probability jackpot result. A determination is made (step S2711). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read out of the first hold information acquired this time, and the numerical information is compared with one of the numerical information of the low-probability jackpot result set in the distribution table. It is determined whether or not it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2711, the firing promotion hold command is set as the first hold command to be transmitted to the sound-side MPU 93 (step S2712). This first hold command is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 in step S1906 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 37A). The sound-light-side MPU 93, as will be described in detail later, when receiving a firing promotion hold command as a first hold command, plays the game ball in the second special figure display unit 37b so as to execute the game as many times as possible. The notification for prompting the launch is executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2703, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2704, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2705, or if a negative determination is made in step S2711, a normal hold command is sent to the sound-side MPU 93. Is set as the first hold command to be transmitted (step S2713). This first hold command is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 in step S1906 in the first hold information acquisition process (FIG. 37A). As will be described later in detail, when receiving the normal hold command as the first hold command, the sound-light-side MPU 93 performs notification to indicate that the number of held first hold information has increased.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the hold command corresponding processing executed by the display side MPU 103. The pending command processing is executed in the command processing of step S1102 in the V interrupt processing (FIG. 17).

  When the first hold command is transmitted from the main MPU 82 to the sound MPU 93, the sound MPU 93 transmits a corresponding first hold command to the display MPU 103. When the display-side MPU 103 receives the first hold command (step S2801: YES), the display-side MPU 103 executes a process of increasing the hold display image (step S2802). Thus, the number of the reserved images G1 displayed in the regular reserved display area 42 of the symbol display device 41 increases by one in the normal gaming state, and the first reserved display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 in the high probability state. Is incremented by one.

  If the first suspension command received this time corresponds to the suspension command for frequency notification (step S2803: YES), start processing of frequency reporting is executed (step S2804). In the start process of the number notification, information on the number of notifications set in the hold command for the number notification is read, and the number display corresponding to the information on the number of notifications is executed by the symbol display device 41. FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the number notification performed by the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 46 (a), a character image such as “Please make the special figure 2 fluctuate 11 times continuously! Fluctuation exceeding 11 times is NG! You. The player who has confirmed the notification of the number of times causes the second special figure display unit 37b to repeat the game times 11 times in the current high probability state, and thereafter stops the firing of the game ball to play the game on the first special figure display unit 37a. It becomes possible to recognize that the execution must be performed. Then, by performing the firing operation in this way, after the maximum number of small hit results that can be generated in the current high probability state is generated with the game times in the second special figure display unit 37b as an opportunity, the second It is possible to generate a jackpot result triggered by the number of games in the one special map display section 37a.

  Returning to the description of the hold command handling process (FIG. 45), after executing the count notification start process in step S2804, the count notification flag provided in the display RAM 105 is set to "1" (step S2805). The number-of-times notification flag is a flag for the display side MPU 103 to specify that the number of times is being notified. Note that the state in which the frequency notification is executed ends when a new jackpot result is generated. At that time, the frequency notification flag is cleared to “0”.

  If the first hold command received this time does not correspond to the number-of-times notification hold command but the launch promotion notification command (step S2806: YES), the launch promotion notification start process is executed (step S2807). In the start processing of the launch promotion notification, the launch promotion notification is executed by the symbol display device 41. FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram for describing the content of the launch promotion notification executed by the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 46 (b), a character image “Turn as much as possible !!” is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as the launch promotion notification. The player who confirms the launch promotion notification keeps launching the game ball so that the game turn in the second special figure display unit 37b is executed as much as possible in the current high probability state. By performing the firing operation in this manner, by the time the big hit result triggered by the game time in the first special figure display unit 37a occurs, the small hit triggered by the game time in the second special figure display unit 37b is generated. It is possible to generate as many results as possible. Note that the state in which the launch promotion notification is being executed ends when a big hit result newly occurs.

  Returning to the description of the pending command corresponding processing (FIG. 45), when a fluctuation pattern command indicating that the game times should be newly started is received (step S2808: YES), a reduction processing of the reserved display image is executed (step S2809). ). Thereby, the display of the hold image G1 in the normal hold display area 42 of the symbol display device 41 is reduced by one in the normal game state, and is reduced in the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 in the high probability state. The display of the reserved image G1 is reduced by one. Thereafter, on condition that “1” is set in the count notification flag of the display side RAM 105 (step S2810: YES), the update processing of the count notification is executed (step S2811). By executing the updating process, the notification of the number of times displayed on the symbol display device 41 indicates “Change the special figure 2 continuously N times! Change exceeding N times is NG!” (N is The value of N of the character image (an integer of 1 or more) is subtracted by 1.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Even if the mode is shifted to the high-probability mode, if the number of executions of the game times in the high-probability mode reaches the end reference number, the high-probability mode ends. Thereby, in the high probability mode, the game is played while being aware of the number of continuations of the remaining game times of the high probability mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the prefetch notification corresponding to the content of the first hold information is executed at a timing before the first hold information becomes an execution target of the game number. This allows the player to predict the contents of the first hold information before the game round triggered by the first hold information is started. In this case, the execution content of the prefetch notification is different, using the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability mode as at least one criterion. As a result, it is possible to associate the content of the prefetch notification with the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability mode, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the prefetch notification.

  In the configuration in which the first hold information and the second hold information are separately obtained, the prefetch notification is started when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained, and the remaining game in the high probability mode is performed. The pre-reading notification is executed in a state of being associated with the number of times of continuation. With this, when the pre-reading notification is executed, any of the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information within the range of the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability mode is performed. Can be recognized by the player as to whether or not the game should be digested.

  In the high probability mode, the game times triggered by the second hold information are more easily digested than the game times triggered by the first hold information. As a result, in the high probability mode, the number of game times triggered by the second hold information is increased. In this case, the prefetch notification is executed when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, and the remaining game times in the high-probability mode at the timing when the first hold information is acquired are continued. The execution contents of the prefetch notification differ depending on the number of times. Thereby, the situation where the game times triggered by the second hold information should be consumed preferentially should be continued as it is, or the game times triggered by the second hold information should not be executed and the second time corresponding to the jackpot result It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not to execute the game round triggered by the 1 hold information.

  In a configuration in which the number of game rounds triggered by the second hold information is frequently executed in the high probability mode, the second hold information corresponds to the small hit result even if the second hold information does not correspond to the big hit result. The open / close execution mode occurs while preventing the change to the low probability mode. In this case, in the high-probability mode, it is more advantageous for the player to execute many game rounds triggered by the second hold information. On the other hand, when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired in the high probability mode, it is advantageous for the player to execute the game times triggered by the first hold information in the high probability mode. Become. In this configuration, the prefetch notification is executed in response to the acquisition of the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, and the continuation of the remaining game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information is acquired. Due to the difference in the execution content of the look-ahead notification in relation to the number of times, through the execution content of the look-ahead notification, a game time triggered by any pending information is executed within a range of the number of times of the remaining game times in the high probability mode. It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game should be performed.

  Since the game times triggered by the first hold information and the game times triggered by the second hold information are executed in an overlapped manner, the number of game times executed per unit time can be increased. Further, in the high probability mode, the duration of the game times triggered by the second hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result is shorter than the game times triggered by the first hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot result. Therefore, in the high probability mode, the number of game times triggered by the second hold information is easily consumed. Further, even if the game times triggered by the second hold information are easily digested in the high probability mode, the game times triggered by the first hold information and the second hold information are triggered as described above. Since the game times described above are executed in an overlapping manner, the game times triggered by the first hold information are also executed in the high probability mode. In this case, the prefetch notification is executed when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, and the remaining game times in the high-probability mode at the timing when the first hold information is acquired are continued. Due to the difference in the execution content of the prefetch notification in relation to the number of times, the game times triggered by any of the hold information should be executed within the range of the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability mode. This makes it possible for the player to recognize whether or not there is.

  Regardless of the number of executions of the remaining game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the number of executions of the game times triggered by the second hold information is any number of times. If the number of game times triggered by the first hold information is the number of times that can be started in the current high-probability mode, it is notified that a firing operation to acquire the second hold information should be performed as prefetch notification. This allows the player to recognize that as many game rounds as possible triggered by the second hold information should be consumed before the game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is started. It becomes possible.

  When the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times of execution of the game times triggered by the second hold information If the number of game times triggered by the first hold information is the number of times that cannot be started in the current high probability mode, the number of executions of the game times triggered by the second hold information should be less than a predetermined number as prefetch notification. Is notified. Thereby, the player is informed that the number of executions of the game times triggered by the second hold information should be adjusted so that the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result are executed in the high probability mode. It becomes possible to make them recognize.

  Regardless of the number of executions of the remaining game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the number of executions of the game times triggered by the second hold information is any number of times. If the number of game times triggered by the first hold information is the number of times that can be started in the current high-probability mode, and if the first hold information corresponds to a high-accuracy jackpot result, a prompt to launch a game ball is prompted. The notification for launch promotion is prevented from being executed, and the notification for launch promotion is executed when the first suspension information corresponds to the low-probability jackpot result. If the first hold information corresponds to a low-probability jackpot result, the notification for launch promotion is executed, and if the high-probability mode cannot be continued, It is possible to urge the player to spend as many game rounds as possible triggered by the second suspension information so that many profits are given to the player. On the other hand, when the first hold information corresponds to the high-accuracy jackpot result, the notification for launch promotion is not executed, so that the number of game rounds triggered by the second hold information has been increased. As a result, a situation occurs in which a game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the low-probability jackpot result is executed earlier than a game round triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the high-probability jackpot result. Can be prevented from being triggered by the execution of the notification for launch promotion.

  When the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability mode at the timing when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired is equal to or more than the predetermined number of times of execution of the game times triggered by the second hold information If the number of game times triggered by the first hold information is the number of times that cannot be started in the current high probability mode, and if the first hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability mode, The prefetch notification for the frequency notification indicating that the number of executions of the game times to be performed based on the second reservation information should be less than the predetermined number is executed, and the first reservation information is set in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In any case, if the information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result, the prefetch notification for the frequency notification is not executed. When the first hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability mode, the pre-reading notification for the frequency notification is executed so that the first hold information is a game in the high probability mode. It is possible to make the player recognize what should be the execution trigger of the round. On the other hand, if the first hold information is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result regardless of whether the first hold information is in the low-probability mode or the high-probability mode, the first hold information is executed after the high-probability mode ends. Even if it is an opportunity, a jackpot result will occur. In this case, the first hold information does not need to be executed in the current high probability mode. Therefore, in such a situation, the necessity of execution is low by preventing the execution of the prefetch notification for the number of times notification. It is possible to prevent the prefetch notification for the frequency notification from being executed in the situation.

  Even in a situation where a small hit result is triggered by the second hold information and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is executed, a game round triggered by the first hold information can be executed. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the digestion rate of the game times.

  In the situation where the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed, the game round is not executed. Thereby, when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is executed, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The other of the first and second holding information in a situation where the game is being executed with the holding information being one of the first and second holding information and the holding information corresponding to the jackpot result. When the game round triggered by the hold information is started, the other hold information is not treated as the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result. Accordingly, in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed with one of the first holding information and the second holding information as a trigger, the opening / closing corresponding to the jackpot result is triggered with the other holding information. It is possible to prevent the execution modes from being duplicated. On the other hand, in one of a situation in which the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result and a situation in which the open / close execution mode corresponding to the small hit result is executed, When a game round triggered by the first suspension information is started, the first suspension information can be treated as suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result. As a result, the first hold information corresponding to the big hit result indicates that the game round triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result has been executed, and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result has been executed. It is possible to prevent the information from being treated as pending information corresponding to the jackpot result for the reason.

  The duration of the game times triggered by the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the high probability mode is the duration of the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the result of the small hit in the high probability mode and the small hit The period is set to be equal to or longer than the total period of the execution period of the open / close execution mode corresponding to the result. Thereby, in the situation where the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the game round or the small hit result is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result, the first hold information corresponding to the big hit result is triggered. Even if the game round is started, the game round triggered by the first hold information is ended after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result ends. This makes it possible to prevent the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the big hit result from being executed in duplicate.

  An event that results in a miss in a game round triggered by the second hold information occurs only in a situation where a game round targeted for execution of the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is being executed. In this case, in a situation where the game time with the first hold information as the execution target is being executed, if the game time with the second hold information as the execution target is out of order, the first currently held first hold information is executed. This means that a jackpot result occurs in a game round for which information is to be executed. In other words, it is possible to execute the occurrence notification of the jackpot result by using the event that the result of the game is a game result for which the second suspension information is executed as the execution target.

<Another form of the fourth embodiment>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the fourth embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following another embodiment may be applied to the configuration of the fourth embodiment individually or in combination.

  The high-probability mode is used instead of the configuration in which the content of the notification to be executed among the pre-reading notification for the frequency notification and the pre-reading notification for launch promotion is determined according to the number of executions of the remaining game times in the high probability mode. The content of these notifications may be determined according to the number of games executed in.

  In the case where the prefetch notification for the frequency notification is executed, the configuration may be such that the period until the game time for which the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is to be executed is started is notified. Thereby, the player can recognize the period until the first round information corresponding to the jackpot result starts the game round to be executed, and as many small hit results as possible in that period. Thus, the launch of the game ball toward the second operation port 34 is continued.

  -As a type of jackpot result, a low-probability jackpot result does not exist, and when a jackpot result is obtained, a configuration may be adopted in which a high-accuracy jackpot result is ensured. In addition, instead of the above configuration, when the second hold information is the target of the hit / fail judgment processing and the jackpot result is obtained, the high-accuracy big hit result is surely obtained, or the second hold information is the target of the hit / fail judgment processing and the big hit result is determined. In such a case, a winning in the V winning opening may be enabled, and a winning in the V winning opening may be generated, so that a highly accurate big hit result may be obtained. In the case of these configurations, a low-probability jackpot result will not be obtained at least in the game times for which the second suspension information has been executed. Therefore, when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired at a timing that is reliably executed within the range of the high probability mode, the look-ahead notification for launch promotion is executed regardless of the type of the jackpot result. It is preferable to adopt a configuration.

  -Instead of the configuration in which the normal gaming state and the high probability state are set as the gaming state, a low frequency support state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode and a high frequency support state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode Is set, and when the number of game times executed in the high-frequency support state reaches the end reference number, the low-frequency support state is set. A configuration in which the pre-reading notification of the above or the pre-reading notification for launch promotion is executed may be applied.

  -It is not limited to a configuration in which the game times for which the first hold information is to be executed and the game times for which the second hold information is to be executed are overlapped, and one of these game times is not limited to this. Is executed, the start of the other game time is prevented, and the game time targeted for execution of the second hold information is executed in preference to the game time targeted for execution of the first hold information. The configuration in which the pre-reading information for informing the number of times or the pre-reading information for promoting the firing as in the fourth embodiment may be applied to the configuration to be performed.

  -In the situation where the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is executed, the start of the game round may be prevented. In this case, the player's attention to the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result can be increased. Further, a configuration in which the prefetch notification for the frequency notification and the prefetch notification for the firing promotion as in the fourth embodiment may be applied to the configuration.

  -Even if the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is being executed, the start of the game round may be allowed. In this case, it is possible to increase the digestion rate of the game times. However, in this configuration, it is conceivable that the game round corresponding to the jackpot result ends in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is being executed. In this case, the opening / closing execution mode may be newly started after the currently executed opening / closing execution mode ends, and the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the end of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result may be the current state. It may be configured to be executed in a form integrated with the open / close execution mode being executed (for example, the number of executions of the round game is increased).

  When the second hold information is subjected to the hit determination process, a configuration may be adopted in which a result that is neither a big hit result nor a small hit result is obtained.

  -The game times for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target and the game times for which the hold information corresponding to the departure result is the execution target of the first hold information and the second hold information are executed in an overlapping manner. In the situation where the game time for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends earlier, the opening and closing execution mode is started until the game time for which the hold information corresponding to the miss result is the execution target ends. Is not limited to the configuration that is delayed, and at the timing when the game information for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target ends, the game information for which the hold information corresponding to the miss result is the execution target is A configuration may be adopted in which the open / close execution mode is immediately started by forcibly terminating it. Thus, it is possible to prevent the period until the opening / closing execution mode is started from being lengthened.

  In addition, at the timing when the game round for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target is ended, the game round for which the hold information corresponding to the miss result is the execution target is temporarily stopped, and then the open / close execution mode ends. After that, the temporarily stopped game may be restarted, or the temporarily stopped game may be restarted from the beginning. In the configuration in which the game round once stopped is restarted from the beginning, it may be configured to newly execute a hit / fail determination process for the hold information that has triggered the start of the game round. It is good also as composition which succeeds a result.

  -In the situation where the game information for which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is the execution target is being executed, if the game information for which the hold information on the side different from the hold information is to be executed is started, The hold information is not limited to a configuration that is treated as a departure result regardless of its content, and the hold information of the different side is subject to execution of the rejection determination process, but the hold information of the different side is subject to execution. When the game round ends, a configuration may be adopted in which the result is treated as a departure result regardless of the execution result of the hit / fail determination processing.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the configuration for improving the playability and interest of the game. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  In the first embodiment, at least a part of the period during which the game is executed on the first special figure display unit 37a and at least a part of the period during which the game is executed on the second special figure display unit 37b However, in the present embodiment, when one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b executes the game time, the other time the game time is executed. This is a configuration in which the game is not started, and a new game is not started in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game in any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is being executed. It should be noted that, in this manner, when the game time is executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game time is not started on the other. In the symbol display device 41, the decoration area 43, the first hold display area 46, and the second hold display area 48 are formed in the normal game state and the high probability state as shown in FIG. While being displayed, the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47 are not displayed. Then, in both the case where the game turn is executed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the case where the game turn is executed on the second special figure display unit 37b, the variation display of the symbol is displayed in the decoration area 43. Is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the small hit result is not set as the result of the hit / fail determination processing. The same winning / failing table (low probability winning / failing table in the normal game state, high probability winning / failing table in the high probability state) is referred to when the determination process is executed.

  In the first embodiment, the same distribution table is referred to when the first suspension information is to be subjected to the distribution determination process and when the second suspension information is to be subjected to the distribution determination process. However, in the present embodiment, the distribution table referred to differs between the first suspension information and the second suspension information. FIG. 47A and FIG. 47B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the distribution table in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b), in the present embodiment, 4R jackpot results, 8R jackpot results, and 16R jackpot results are set as types of jackpot results. Each of these jackpot results is a jackpot result that triggers the execution of the opening / closing execution mode that is the round number regulation mode, and the game state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is a high probability state (a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode). This is the jackpot result. That is, in the present embodiment, there is no big hit result in which the game state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). However, the high-probability state ends when the number of times of execution of the game has reached the end reference number of times without transition to the open / close execution mode as in the fourth embodiment, and the game state is the normal game state. State. The end reference number is the same regardless of the jackpot result.

  The 4R jackpot result, the 8R jackpot result, and the 16R jackpot result differ in the number of round games executed in the open / close execution mode. Specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 4R jackpot result, four round games occur, and in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 8R jackpot result, eight round games occur, triggered by the 16R jackpot result. In the open / close execution mode, 16 round games occur. Therefore, among the jackpot results, the 4R jackpot result is the most disadvantageous, the 8R jackpot result is next most advantageous, and the 16R jackpot result is the most advantageous.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (a), the first special map distribution table referred to when the first hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is to be subjected to the distribution determination process includes a jackpot result. 4R jackpot result and 16R jackpot result are set as the types of. In this case, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 89” corresponds to the 4R jackpot result, and “90 to 99” corresponds to the 16R jackpot result. Therefore, when the first hold information triggers a jackpot result, the probability of a 4R jackpot result is higher than the probability of a 16R jackpot result.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (b), the second special map assignment table referred to when the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is to be subjected to the assignment determination processing includes the jackpot result. 8R jackpot result and 16R jackpot result are set as the types of. In this case, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 99”, “0 to 49” corresponds to the 8R jackpot result, and “50 to 99” corresponds to the 16R jackpot result. Therefore, in the case of a jackpot result triggered by the second hold information, the probability of a 16R jackpot result and the probability of an 8R jackpot result are the same.

  When the first hold information and the second hold information are compared, if the first hold information triggers a jackpot result, the 4R jackpot result can be selected and the 4R jackpot result is more than the probability of a 16R jackpot result. If the probability is higher, but the jackpot result is triggered by the second hold information, the 4R jackpot result may be selected instead of the 4R jackpot result, and the probability of the 16R jackpot result and the 8R jackpot result may be selected. Is the same as the probability. Therefore, the case where the jackpot result is triggered by the second hold information is more advantageous to the player than the case where the jackpot result is triggered by the first hold information. More specifically, the probability of a jackpot result when the hit / fail determination process is performed on the first hold information is the same as the probability of a hit result when the hit / fail determination process is performed on the second hold information. It is. Then, it is more advantageous for the player to execute the game round triggered by the second hold information than to execute the game round triggered by the first hold information.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the special power termination processing according to the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. In the present embodiment, since the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b are not performed in an overlapping manner, the game times on the first special figure display unit 37b are not repeated. The first special figure special power control processing and the second special figure special power control processing are not individually set, but a common special figure special power control processing is executed for both the first hold information and the second hold information. . The basic processing configuration of the common special figure special power control processing is the same as the first special figure special power control processing (FIG. 10) and the second special figure special power control processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment. In the common special figure special power control processing, when the value of the special figure special power counter provided in the main RAM 84 is “0”, the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed, and the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “1”. , The special figure changing process is executed, and if the value of the special figure special power counter is “2”, the special figure fixing process is executed. If the value of the special figure special power counter is “3”, The special power starting process is executed, the special power opening process is executed when the value of the special power counter is “4”, and the special power closing process is executed when the value of the special power counter is “5”. When the value of the special figure special power counter is "6", the special power ending processing is executed.

  As in the first embodiment, the ending period is set in the special power opening process, but when the ending period has elapsed (step S2901: YES), the game state setting process is executed. . In the game state setting process, “1” is set to the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 (step S2902), and “80” is set to the game frequency counter of the main RAM 84 (step S2903).

  The high-probability flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the win / fail lottery mode is the high-probability mode. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, after the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is completed, if the game times of the end reference number of times (specifically, 80 times) are executed without the jackpot result, The game state transitions from the high probability state to the normal game state. The number-of-games counter is a counter for specifying the remaining number of end reference times by the main MPU 82. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S2904). Thereby, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start processing.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the special figure finalizing process according to the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

  When the final stop period of the current game has elapsed (step S3001: YES), if the value of the game frequency counter is 1 or more (step S3002: YES), the value of the game frequency counter is decremented by 1 (step S3003). ). Then, when the value of the game number counter after the subtraction of 1 is “0” (step S3004: YES), the high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to “0” (step S3005). Thereby, the game state shifts from the high probability state to the normal game state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3002, if a negative determination is made in step S3004, or if the process of step S3005 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current game round is a game round corresponding to the jackpot result. (Step S3006). If the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result (step S3006: YES), the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S3007). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is "2" when the special figure special processing is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter which is added by 1 corresponds to the special power start processing. It becomes “3”. On the other hand, if the current game time does not correspond to the jackpot result (step S3006: NO), the value of the special figure special power counter is cleared to “0” (step S3008). Thereby, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start processing.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the special figure change start processing in the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82.

  In the special figure change start process, the second reserved information is reserved in the second special figure reserved area 126 on condition that either the first reserved information or the second reserved information is reserved (step S3101: YES). It is determined whether or not it is stored (step S3102). Note that, in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, up to four pieces of first holding information are held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125, and up to four pieces of first holding information are stored in the second special figure holding area 126. Is held and stored.

  If the second hold information is on hold (step S3102: YES), a data setting process for the second special figure is executed (step S3103). In the data setting process of the second special figure, the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure holding area 126 is moved to the execution area 127b for the second special figure. As a result, the start target of the current game round is the second special figure display section 37b. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 126 is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d to the lower area side. The data in the first area 126a is cleared and the second area 126b → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first area 126a, the third area 126c → the second area 126b, the fourth area 126d → the third area 126c, and so on. Thereafter, the value of the second special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is decremented by one. As a result, the display content of the second special figure suspension display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the second suspension information is reduced by one. Further, in the data setting process, a second decrease command indicating that the second hold information in the second special figure holding area 126 has decreased by one is transmitted to the MPU 93 on the sound light side. The sound-light-side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second decrease command to the display-side MPU 103 to display the number of the second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41 as the hold information. Make changes to accommodate the decrease in numbers.

  If the second hold information is not stored on the hold (step S3102: NO), the data setting process for the first special figure is executed (step S3104). In the data setting processing of the first special figure, the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure reservation area 125 is moved to the execution area 127a for the first special figure. As a result, the start target of the current game round is the first special map display section 37a. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 125 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first area 125a and the second area 125b → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first area 125a, the third area 125c → the second area 125b, the fourth area 125d → the third area 125c, and so on. Thereafter, the value of the first special figure reservation counter of the main RAM 84 is decremented by one. As a result, the display content of the first special figure suspension display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is changed to the content in which the first suspension information is reduced by one. In the data setting process, a first decrease command indicating that the first hold information in the first special figure holding area 125 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The sound-light-side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first decrease-time command to the display-side MPU 103, thereby displaying the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41. The display of the number is changed according to the decrease in the number of pending information.

  Here, by executing the process of step S3102, even if the first suspension information is acquired at a timing earlier than the second suspension information when the second suspension information is stored in the suspension, The 2 hold information is a trigger for starting the game round. Thus, the execution of the game round on the second special figure display unit 37b can be prioritized over the execution of the game round on the first special figure display unit 37a. As described above, it is more advantageous for the player that the second suspension information becomes the target of starting the game round than the first reservation information becomes the target of starting the game round. In this case, the game times in the second special figure display portion 37b are digested in preference to the game times in the first special figure display portion 37a, so that the priority is given to the second hold information that is advantageous to the player. As a result, it becomes possible to start the game round.

  When the process of step S3103 or step S3104 is executed, a hit / fail determination process is executed (step S3105). In the success / failure determination process, if the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode, the low probability success / failure table is stored in the main ROM 83 regardless of whether the start of the game is the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. If the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode, the high-accuracy winning / rejecting table is read from the main ROM 83 regardless of whether the game round start target is the first special figure display section 37a or the second special figure display section 37b. . After reading the hit / fail table, the hit / fail determination is performed based on the hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure which is the start target of the current game round. , That is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1, and it is determined whether the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the hit / fail table.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is a jackpot result (step S3106: YES), the distribution determination process is executed (step S3107). In the distribution determination process, when the start target of the current game round is the first hold information, the distribution table for the first special figure is read from the main ROM 83, and the start target of the current game round is the second hold information. If the information is information, the distribution table for the second special map is read from the main ROM 83. After the distribution table is read, distribution is performed based on the hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure, which is the start target of the current game round. The information for determination, that is, the numerical information acquired from the jackpot type counter C2 is read, and the read numerical information specifies which type of jackpot result in the distribution table.

  After executing the distribution determination processing, "1" is set to the flag of the main RAM 84 corresponding to the type of the jackpot result specified in the distribution determination processing (step S3108). Specifically, when the 4R jackpot result is supported, the 1R jackpot flag is set to “1”, and when the 8R jackpot result is supported, the 1R jackpot flag is set to “1”. If it corresponds to the jackpot result, "1" is set to the 16R jackpot flag. In the following description, the process of determining whether or not the result is various jackpots is performed by determining whether or not "1" is set in a corresponding flag of the main RAM 84. The state in which “1” is set in step S3108 is cleared to “0” when the special power ending process ends when the open / close execution mode ends.

  After executing the jackpot result flag setting process, a jackpot result stop result setting process is executed (step S3109). More specifically, the information on the pattern stop mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is the start target of the current game round, is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance for the jackpot result. The specified information is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. In the stop result table for the jackpot result, the type of the stop mode of the pattern stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is set differently for each type of the big hit result. In step S3109, the main RAM 84 stores information on the pattern stop mode according to the type of the jackpot result specified in step S3108. It should be noted that a pattern stop mode may be set in one-to-one correspondence with each jackpot result, or a plurality of types of pattern stop modes may be set for at least some of the jackpot results. The method of selecting a stop result for a jackpot result in which a plurality of types of pattern stop modes are set is arbitrary, but a configuration in which the stop result is selected according to, for example, a value of a jackpot type counter C2 may be employed.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is not a jackpot result (step S3106: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S3110). Specifically, in the current game round, the information of the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is stored in the main ROM 83 in advance. From the stop result table for use, and the specified information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result, and is common to the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b. One type.

  When the process of step S3109 or step S3110 is executed, a process of specifying a variable display period is executed (step S3112). In the process of specifying the variable display period, the variable display period table is read from the main ROM 83. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the game time to be started this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. In this case, it is determined that a reach effect is to be generated if the current game start time corresponds to the jackpot result. In addition, even when the game times targeted for the start this time do not correspond to the jackpot result, the current game among the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure If the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored on the side to be started is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach effect will occur. When it is determined that a reach effect is generated, the reach generation variable display period table stored in the main ROM 83 is read out from the main ROM 83, and when it is determined that no reach effect is generated, the reach display is stored in the main ROM 83. The variable display period table for reach non-occurrence is read from the main ROM 83. After that, the current numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained, and the fluctuation display period is determined by checking the fluctuation display period table that has already been read. Then, the information of the determined variable display period is set in a special figure special power timer counter provided in the main RAM 84.

  Then, the current value set in the game number counter of the main RAM 84 is read (step S3112). Then, the variation command and the type command corresponding to the game time to be started this time are transmitted to the sound-side MPU 93 (step S3113). The command for change includes information on the change display period specified in step S3111, and the game time to be started is displayed on either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Information indicating whether or not they are supported is included. Further, the fluctuation command includes information on whether or not to execute a reach effect. If the variable display period is completely different between the situation where the reach effect is not performed and the situation where the reach effect is performed, the information directly indicating whether or not to execute the reach effect is a command for variation. It does not have to be set. Further, the change command includes information indicating whether or not the current game state is the high probability state, and the value of the game number counter grasped in step S3112, that is, the current game state is the high probability state. If present, information indicating the remaining number of continuations of the high probability state is included. The type command includes information as to whether or not the game time that is to be started this time corresponds to the jackpot result. If the type corresponds to the jackpot result, the type of the jackpot result is any type of jackpot result. Is included.

  After that, in the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the display unit that is the start target of the current game round starts the variable display of the pattern (step S3114). Then, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S3115). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is “0”, the value of the special figure special power counter targeted for addition by adding 1 is changed to the special figure fluctuation processing. It will be the corresponding "1".

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a table setting process in the present embodiment, which is executed by the sound-light-side MPU 93. The table setting process is executed in step S901 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 15).

  When the change command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 82 (step S3201: YES), the game result storage process is executed (step S3202). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, the result of the hit / fail judgment and the distribution judgment determined by the main MPU 82 at the start of the current game round is specified, and the specified information is transmitted to the sound light side. Write to RAM95. Thereafter, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S3203). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is a 16R jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination by the same odd number of symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. If the game result of the game round is the 4R jackpot result or the 8R jackpot result, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same even symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. Also, in the stop symbol determination processing, if the game result of the current game round is a departure result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the contents of the command for change. Then, when a reach effect occurs, information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established and the stop result in which the combination of the reach symbols is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach display does not occur, information corresponding to the stop result in which both the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the reach symbols are not established is determined as the information of the current stop result.

  Thereafter, a process of reading the effect lottery table is executed (step S3204). In the reading process, an effect lottery table corresponding to the current situation is read from the sound-light side ROM 94. Then, an effect lottery process is executed (step S3205). In the production lottery process, the numerical information of the production lottery counter provided to be periodically updated in the sound-light side RAM 95 is read, and the numerical information is collated with the production lottery table read in step S3204. Then, the type of effect to be generated in the current game round is specified.

  Thereafter, a control table reading process corresponding to the content of the effect performed in the current game is executed (step S3206). In this process, the information of the fluctuation display period is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, the information of the fluctuation display period, the information of the game result specified in step S3202, and the stop result in step S3203. And the control table corresponding to the combination of the information of the effect lottery process in step S3205 and the information of the effect lottery process from the sound-light side ROM 94, and writes the control table in the sound-light side RAM 95. In the control table, the content of the light emission control of the display light-emitting unit 64 corresponding to the effect for the current game and the content of the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 corresponding to the effect for the current game are set. The light emission control of the display light emitting unit 64 and the sound output control of the speaker unit 65 are performed according to the control table.

  After that, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the display side MPU 103 (step S3207). The fluctuation pattern command includes information on the fluctuation display period of the game time to be started, information indicating whether the game time to be started corresponds to the jackpot result or the missed result, and Information indicating which of the first special figure display section 37a and the second special figure display section 37b the target game time corresponds to, information of the stop result determined in step S3203, And information on the result of the effect lottery process in step S3205. Upon receiving the fluctuation pattern command, the display-side MPU 103 starts display control for executing an effect for game play on the symbol display device 41. In the table setting process, other processes are executed in addition to the above processes, similarly to step S1009 in the first embodiment.

  FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the process of reading the effect lottery table in step S3204.

  When the current game state is not the high probability state (step S3301: NO), or when the game result of the current game is not the jackpot result (step S3302: NO), the process of reading another effect lottery table is executed. (Step S3303). In the other effect lottery tables, a plurality of types of effects are set as effects for the game round, and the effect lottery is performed for each of the effects so that the selection probability of the plurality of effects is a predetermined probability. The counter value is assigned. Specifically, an effect lottery table for when a reach occurs and an effect lottery table for when no reach occurs are set in the other effect lottery tables. If the current game time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect, the effect draw table for the time of the reach occurrence in the other effect lottery tables is read from the sound-light side ROM 94, and the current game time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. If not, the effect lottery table for non-reach occurrence in the other effect lottery tables is read from the sound-light side ROM 94. A plurality of types of reach effects are set in the effect lottery table for the occurrence of reach, and a plurality of types of announcement effects to be executed before the reach effect is generated are set. A plurality of types of announcement effects are set in the effect lottery table for when no reach occurs. By reading the effect lottery table for the occurrence of the reach, in the effect lottery process (step S3205), the type of reach effect and the type of the notice effect that can be executed within the duration of the current game round are determined by lottery. Is done. By reading out the effect lottery table for when no reach occurs, the type of the announcement effect that can be executed within the duration of the current game round is determined by the lottery in the effect lottery process (step S3205).

  In the process of reading the effect lottery table, if the current game state is the high probability state (step S3301: YES) and the game result of the current game round is the jackpot result (step S3302: YES), the fluctuation received this time Numerical information of the number-of-games counter set in the command for the game, that is, the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the current high-probability state, and whether the grasped number of continuations of the remaining game times is equal to or less than the branch reference number It is determined whether or not it is (step S3304). The branch reference number is set to 30 times. Here, in the high probability state, the probability of selecting the jackpot result in the hit / fail determination processing is 1/30. The branch reference number is the number of denominators of the jackpot probability. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the branch reference number may be set to a number greater than or less than 30.

  When the remaining continuation number of the high probability state is equal to or less than the branch reference number (step S3304: YES), the first effect lottery table is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 (step S3305). If the remaining continuation count of the high-probability state is larger than the branch reference count (step S3304: NO), the game result of the current game cycle is changed to the 16R jackpot result based on the information set in the type command received this time. Is determined (step S3306). If it corresponds to the 16R jackpot result (step S3306: YES), the first effect lottery table is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 (step S3307), if it does not correspond to the 16R jackpot result (step S3306: NO), The two-effect lottery table is read from the sound-light side ROM 94 (step S3308).

  The first effect lottery table and the second effect lottery table will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. In the first effect lottery table and the second effect lottery table, a plurality of types of effects are set as effects for the game round, and each effect is selected so that the selection probability of the plurality of types of effects becomes a predetermined probability. The value of the effect lottery counter is assigned to each of them. In detail, since the first production lottery table and the second production lottery table are production lottery tables that are selected only in the game times that result in the jackpot, the first production lottery table and the second production lottery table have a plurality of types. Is set, and a plurality of types of notice effects to be executed before the reach effect is generated are set. In this case, as shown in FIG. 52 (a), the probability that the special effect is selected as the reach effect is set to 30% in the first effect lottery table, whereas the second effect lottery table is set in the second effect lottery table. Reach productions that can be selected do not include special productions. Also, the special effect is not included in the types of reach effects that can be selected in other effect lottery tables read out in step S3303. Therefore, the first production lottery table is read out, the remaining number of game times in the high-probability state is the number of continuations less than or equal to the branch reference number, and the game time or the high-probability state in which one of the jackpot results is obtained. In the situation where the number of continuations of the remaining game times is larger than the reference number of branches, a special effect is generated only in the game time that results in a 16R jackpot, and no special effect is generated in other situations.

  The timing at which the special effect is executed will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 53 (a) to 53 (d). FIG. 53 (a) shows the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state, FIG. 53 (b) shows the execution timing of the special effect, and FIG. 53 (c) shows the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the 16R jackpot result 53 (d) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode triggered by the 4R jackpot result or the 8R jackpot result.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a), a special effect is generated as shown in FIG. 53 (b) at the timing t1 before the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state becomes the branch reference number, As shown in FIG. 53 (c), a 16R jackpot result occurs. That is, when the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high-probability state is larger than the reference number of branches, a special effect may be generated on condition that a 16R jackpot result is generated. Thereby, if a special effect occurs at a relatively early stage in the high probability state, it is determined that the most advantageous 16R jackpot result will occur, and the player who has recognized the occurrence of the special effect will You will be very satisfied.

  On the other hand, in a situation where the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high-probability state is equal to or less than the reference number of branches, the 4R jackpot result or the 8R jackpot result occurs as shown at the timing of t2, and the timing shown at t3. As described above, a special effect may occur in any case where the 16R jackpot result occurs. Regardless of which jackpot result occurs in the pachinko machine 10, a high-probability state in which the reference number of termination is 80 occurs after the end of the open / close execution mode. Then, when the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high-probability state decreases, the player wants to obtain a jackpot result because any type of game can be used. In this case, if the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high-probability state is equal to or less than the branch reference number, a special effect may occur regardless of the type of jackpot result. Thus, if a special effect occurs at a relatively late stage in the high probability state, it is determined that a jackpot result will occur, and the player who has recognized the occurrence of the special effect is greatly satisfied with the fact. It will be.

  As a special effect, timing when the symbol display for the game round is being displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the symbol is being displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b. At a specific timing, the display light-emitting unit 64 emits light in a special mode, a special sound is output from the speaker unit 65, and an effect in which a special character is displayed on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The timing and the content of the special effect are optional. For example, the special effect may be configured to start at the timing when the game time starts, or the special effect may be started before the reach effect starts at the game time, and the reach effect may start at the game time. After that, a special effect may be started. Further, it is also possible to provide a blower mechanism for sending air from the front of the firing operation device 28 toward the front of the pachinko machine 10, and to blow air by the blower mechanism as a special effect.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  If the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is larger than the reference number of branches, a special effect may be generated on condition that a 16R jackpot result is generated. Thereby, if a special effect occurs at a relatively early stage in the high probability state, it is determined that the most advantageous 16R jackpot result will occur, and the player who has recognized the occurrence of the special effect will You will be very satisfied.

  On the other hand, when the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high-probability state decreases, the player wants to obtain a jackpot result because it can be any type. In this case, if the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high-probability state is equal to or less than the branch reference number, a special effect may occur regardless of the type of jackpot result. Thus, if a special effect occurs at a relatively late stage in the high probability state, it is determined that a jackpot result will occur, and the player who has recognized the occurrence of the special effect is greatly satisfied with the fact. It will be.

<Another form of the fifth embodiment>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described fifth embodiment, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following another embodiment may be individually applied to the configuration of the fifth embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  If the 16R jackpot result occurs in a situation where the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high-probability state is greater than the reference number of branches, a special effect may be reliably generated. Thereby, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the special effect in a situation where the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is larger than the reference number of branches.

  ・ It is not limited to the configuration in which the special effect occurs only in the game round in which the jackpot result occurs. In the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired, the game round is executed before the hold information. The special effect may be started in a situation in which a game round triggered by the held information is executed. In this case, it is possible to secure a long period in which the special effect is executed. In this configuration, the special jackpot result that can be a special effect execution target depends on whether the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state at the timing when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained is greater than the branch reference number. The type may be changed, and a jackpot result that can be a special effect execution target depending on whether the number of continuations of the game number at the timing when the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is actually executed is greater than the branch reference number or not. May be changed.

  ・ In the situation where the number of times of the remaining game times in the high probability state is greater than the reference number of branches, the hold information corresponding to either the 8R jackpot result or the 16R jackpot result becomes the execution target of the special effect, and the remaining high probability state In a situation where the number of continuations of the game times is equal to or less than the branch reference number, the hold information corresponding to the 16R jackpot result may be a target for executing the special effect.

  -If three or more types of jackpot results that can be selected when the second suspension information is to be subjected to the success / failure determination process are set, the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is a branch criterion. In the situation where the number of times is larger than the number of times, the special effect can be executed in the game time corresponding to the jackpot result excluding the type of the jackpot with the lowest advantage, while the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state is the branch reference number. In the following situations, a special effect may be executed even at a game time corresponding to any jackpot result.

  -Instead of the configuration in which the normal gaming state and the high probability state are set as the gaming state, a low frequency support state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode and a high frequency support state in which the support mode is the high frequency support mode Is set, and a special effect as in the fifth embodiment is provided for the configuration in which the low frequency support state is set when the number of game times executed in the high frequency support state reaches the end reference number. The configuration to be executed may be applied.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration and playability of the game area PA are different from those of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided so as to include the center of the game area PA. Since the periphery of the variable display unit 36 protrudes forward of the pachinko machine 10 from the surface of the game board 24, an area where the game balls fired in the game area PA can flow down is defined. Specifically, in the game area PA, an upper area PA11 which is an area above a predetermined height position of the variable display unit 36, and the lower area PA11 is continuous with the upper area PA11 below the upper area PA11. The left area PA12, which is the left area, the right area PA13, which is continuous below and below the upper area PA11 and is rightward of the variable display unit 36, and the left area PA12 and the right area PA13, respectively. On the other hand, it is divided into a lower region PA14 which is a region below the variable display unit 36 continuously below it.

  When the player operates the firing operation device 28 with the rotation amount in the first range that is less than the reference rotation amount as the first firing operation, the game ball is positioned leftward of the lateral center position in the upper area PA11. Flow down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA11 → the left area PA12 → the lower area PA14. On the other hand, when the player operates the firing operation device 28 with the rotation amount in the second range that is equal to or larger than the reference rotation amount as the second firing operation, the upper operation area PA11 is shifted rightward from the lateral center position. A game ball flows down. In this case, the game balls flow down in the order of the upper area PA11 → the right area PA13 → the lower area PA14. In other words, the player can play the game such that the game ball flows down the left area PA12 of the left area PA12 and the right area PA13 by adjusting the amount of rotation operation of the firing operation device 28, and at the same time, adjusts the right operation area. A game can be played so that a game ball flows down the PA 13. Incidentally, when the firing operation device 28 is operated with the maximum rotation amount, the game ball flows down in the order of the upper area PA11 → the right area PA13 → the lower area PA14.

  A first operating port 33 is provided in the lower area PA14, as in the first embodiment. However, the second working port 34 and the through gate 35 in the first embodiment are not provided. Instead, in this embodiment, a special ball entry device 151 and a through gate 152 are provided. The configuration of the special ball entry device 151 is the same as that of the first special ball entry device 131 in the third embodiment. Therefore, the special ball-in device 151 can be switched between an open state in which game balls can enter and a closed state in which game balls cannot enter. The special ball-in device 151 and the through gate 152 are provided in a right area PA13 of the game area PA. In addition, the special electric winning device 32 is also provided in the right area PA13. In this case, a game ball flowing down the left area PA12 can win a prize in the first operating port 33 and cannot win a prize in the special ball-in device 151, the through gate 152, and the special prize device 32. A game ball flowing down the right area PA13 can win a special ball-in device 151, a through gate 152, and a special-prize winning device 32, and cannot win a first operating port 33. It should be noted that the number of game balls paid out when one game ball enters the special ball-in device 151 is one, but the payout number may be two or more.

  In the right area PA13, a special ball entry device 151 is provided below the through gate 152. The through gate 152 and the special ball entry device 151 are arranged so that the center in the horizontal direction at each entrance of the game ball is on the same straight line in the vertical direction. Thereby, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 152 in the vertical direction reliably wins the special ball entry device 151 when the special ball entry device 151 is in the open state, and the game ball that passes through the through gate 152 when the special ball entry device 151 is in the closed state. It flows down to the special electric winning device 32.

  The special ball-in device 151 is switched from a closed state to an open state based on a winning in the first through gate 152. Specifically, when a prize is generated in the through gate 152, the hold information on the general-purpose side is acquired with the upper limit of the number of storages (specifically, four) as an upper limit. When the hold information on the general figure side is stored, the internal lottery is performed, and the general figure display unit of the general figure unit 38 provided in the lower left corner which is an area where the game ball does not pass in the game area PA. At 38a, a change display of a picture is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is a winning, a stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the variable display is ended, the special ball-entering device 151 is opened in a predetermined mode. In addition, at a position adjacent to the general-purpose display unit 38a, a general-purpose reserve display unit 38b is provided, and the number of the general-purpose-side reserved information is displayed by turning on the general-purpose reserve display unit 38b. I have.

  When a prize is generated in the first operation port 33, the first reservation information is stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 with a maximum of four pieces being retained, and when a prize is generated in the special ball entry device 151, The second suspension information is suspended and stored in the second special figure suspension area 126 with a maximum of four pieces. In this case, the number of pieces of first hold information held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is notified by the first special figure holding display section 37c, and is held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126. The number of the second suspension information is notified on the second special figure suspension display section 37d.

  The first special figure reservation display part 37c is provided in the upper frame part 153 located above the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36. The first special figure reservation display unit 37c has the same number of light emitting units 154 as the upper limit number of the first reservation information that can be stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 so as to be arranged side by side. In the case where one piece of the first holding information is stored in the first special figure holding area 125, one light emitting unit 154 on the left end is turned on and the other light emitting units 154 are turned off. When two pieces of first holding information are stored in the special figure holding area 125 on hold, the two light emitting units 154 from the left are in a light emitting state and the other light emitting units 154 are in a light off state. When three pieces of first holding information are stored in the holding area 125 on hold, the three light emitting units 154 from the left are turned on and the other light emitting units 154 are turned off. When four pieces of first hold information are stored in the 125, all the light emitting units 154 are in a light emitting state.

  The second special figure reservation display part 37d is provided in the upper frame part 153 located above the symbol display device 41 in the variable display unit 36. The second special figure reservation display section 37d has the same number of light emitting units 155 as the upper limit number of the second reservation information that can be stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 so as to be arranged side by side. When one second holding information is stored in the second special figure holding area 126, one light emitting unit 155 on the left end is turned on and the other light emitting units 155 are turned off, so that the second holding information is turned off. When two pieces of second hold information are stored on hold in the special figure holding area 126, the two light emitting units 155 from the left emit light, and the other light emitting units 155 turn off, so that the second special map is turned off. When three pieces of second holding information are stored on hold in the holding area 126, the three light emitting units 155 from the left are in a light emitting state, and the other light emitting units 155 are in a non-lighting state. When four pieces of second hold information are stored in 126, all the light emitting units 155 are in a light emitting state.

  As the game state other than the open / close execution mode, a normal game state and a high probability state are set as in the first embodiment. In the normal gaming state, the winning / rejecting lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. In the high probability state, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. In addition, when the low frequency support mode is set, the special ball entry device 151 is unlikely to be opened, and when the high frequency support mode is set, the special ball entry device 151 is easily opened.

  Next, the contents of the success / failure table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 55 (a) to 55 (d).

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (d), a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result are set as the hit result in the hit result table. The jackpot result is, as in the first embodiment, an opportunity result that can be a trigger for transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special power winning device 32 is controlled to be opened / closed, and can be a transition opportunity for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode. The small hit result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition for both the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode, while triggering the transition to the opening / closing execution mode in which the special electricity winning device 32 is controlled to open / close. The losing result is a success / failure result that does not trigger the transition to the opening / closing execution mode and also does not trigger the transition for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode.

  The switching to the open / close execution mode will be performed in both the case of the jackpot result and the case of the small hit result as described above. The opening / closing mode of the special electric prize winning device 32 is different between the opening / closing execution mode executed when the winning result is obtained. More specifically, the opening / closing execution mode executed when a jackpot result is obtained is a round number regulation mode executed up to a predetermined number of round games as an upper limit similarly to the first embodiment. As described above, the round game is performed until one of the following conditions is satisfied: a predetermined open continuation period elapses, and a predetermined upper limit number of game balls win the special electric prize winning device 32. It is a game that continues. In this case, the configuration in which the game ball firing mechanism 27 is driven and controlled such that one game ball is fired toward the game area PA in 0.6 seconds in a situation where the shooting operation device 28 is operated by the player. In, the opening duration is set to 29 seconds and the upper limit is set to 10. Therefore, the open duration of the round game is set to a time longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball and the upper limit number of one round game, and the upper limit of the special prize winning device 32 in each round game is set. It can be expected that more game balls will win. In addition, the number of round games executed in the round number regulation mode is the same for a fixed number of rounds regardless of the type of jackpot result that triggered the transition. Specifically, the upper limit number of round games is set to one round regardless of which jackpot results.

  In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit result is obtained, the round game is not set, the number of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 is the upper limit number, and the predetermined upper limit number of game balls is The open / closed number setting mode is terminated when one of the conditions for winning the special power winning device 32 is satisfied. The opening duration of the special power winning device 32 in the opening / closing number regulation mode is longer than the firing cycle of game balls (specifically, 0.6 seconds), and the firing cycle of game balls and the upper limit number (specifically, 10 pieces). Is set to the opening / closing number regulation period shorter than the product of In this pachinko machine 10, since the number of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 in the number-of-opening-and-closing mode is set to one, the one open continuation period is set to the above-mentioned period for opening and closing number. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the number of times of opening and closing of the special power winning device 32 in the number of opening / closing mode is set to a plurality of times, the total period of the plurality of opening continuation periods is the above-mentioned number of opening / closing number. A configuration in which the service period is set may be used. Specifically, the opening / closing number regulation period is set to 1.8 seconds. In the opening / closing execution mode executed when the small hit results, the number of balls held by the player can be increased although the number is smaller than in the opening / closing execution mode executed when the large hit results.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (a) to FIG. 55 (d), the first special map used when determining the first rejection information stored in the first special figure execution area 127a is used as the rejection table. And a second special figure permission table used for determining whether the second hold information stored in the second special figure execution area 127b is valid. Further, the first special figure success / failure table includes a low-accuracy acceptance table and a high-accuracy acceptance table. Similarly, the second special figure success / failure table also includes a low-probability acceptance table and a high-accuracy table. There is a success / failure table. That is, the pachinko machine 10 refers to different winning / failing tables in the first holding information and the second holding information, and in any case, the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are used as the success / absence lottery mode in the success / failure determination. Existing.

  More specifically, each of the win / fail tables will be described. In the low probability win / fail table for the first special map, as shown in FIG. )), And the others are the values of the random numbers that result in an outlier. That is, when the winning / losing determination mode is set to the low probability mode and the winning / losing determination is performed on the first hold information, the winning result may be either the big hit result or the miss result, but the small hit result is not obtained.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot is set to be larger in the high-accuracy table for the first special map than in the low-accuracy table for the first special map. Specifically, the number is 20 (for example, “5”, “34”, “65”, “130”, “163”, “192”, “220”, “245”, “276”, “305”). , "334", "365", "392", "420", "470", "495", "520", "558", "575", "599"). In this case, the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins the big hit in the situation in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that wins in the situation in the high probability mode. Other values of the random numbers are the values of the random numbers resulting in the deviation. That is, when the winning / losing determination mode is set to the high probability mode and the winning / losing determination is performed on the first hold information, any one of the big hit result and the miss result is not a small hit result.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot is the same as that of the low likelihood determination table for the first special figure in the low likelihood determination table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the number of random number values resulting in the small hit result is 40 (for example, “3”, “8”, “31”, “37”, “55”, “68”, “127”, “133”). , "160", "166", "189", "195", "217", "223", "242", "248", "273", "279", "302", "308", " 331, 337, 355, 368, 389, 395, 417, 423, 467, 473, 492, 498, 517 , "523", "555", "561", "572", "578", "596", "598"). Other values of the random numbers are the values of the random numbers resulting in the deviation. In other words, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low-probability mode and the winning / failing determination is made for the second hold information, the result is one of a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (d), the value of the random number resulting in the jackpot is the same as that of the high probability determination table for the first special figure. Therefore, the number of random number values resulting in the jackpot result is larger than that in the case of the low probability table for the second special figure. On the other hand, the value of the random number resulting in the small hit result is the same as that in the low probability table for the second special figure. Other values of the random numbers are the values of the random numbers resulting in the deviation. In other words, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the winning / losing determination is made for the second hold information, the result is one of a big hit result, a small hit result, and a miss result.

  As described above, when the second hold information triggers the determination of success or failure, a small hitting result can be generated, so that the special winning ball device 151 can win the small hitting result. Open / close execution mode is likely to occur. Then, the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result allows the player to slightly increase the number of balls held.

  If the probability of a jackpot result is higher in the high probability mode than the low probability mode, the number and value of the winning random numbers are arbitrary, and in the situation of the low probability mode, the jackpot result In the situation where the value group of the winning random number counter C1 is in the high probability mode, only a part may be included in the value group of the winning random number counter C1 that is a big hit, or a configuration may not be included. .

  In the present embodiment, when a jackpot result occurs in the normal gaming state, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode based on the round number regulation mode, and the gaming state becomes a high probability state after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. This high probability state will certainly continue until the jackpot result has occurred nine times thereafter. If the jackpot result generated in the normal gaming state is the first time, and if the jackpot result is generated ten times, the high probability state is established even after the end of the opening and closing execution mode triggered by the tenth jackpot result. However, this high-probability state ends when four game times, which are the same number as the upper limit number of the four pieces of hold storage of the second hold information, are executed. When the jackpot result is obtained in the high probability state that continues with the upper limit of four times, the game is performed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result in the same manner as when the jackpot result occurs in the normal game state. The state becomes a high-probability state, and this high-probability state reliably continues until nine subsequent jackpot results occur. In the high-probability state, the winning / rejecting lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the normal gaming state, the winning / rejecting lottery mode becomes the same as in the first embodiment. Becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low probability mode.

  In the first embodiment, at least a part of the period during which the game is executed on the first special figure display unit 37a and at least a part of the period during which the game is executed on the second special figure display unit 37b However, in the present embodiment, when the game time is executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game time is executed on the other. The configuration is not started. Further, in a situation where the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the game time in any of the special figure display units 37a and 37b is being executed, a new game time is not started. It should be noted that, in this manner, when the game time is executed on one of the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the game time is not started on the other. In the symbol display device 41, the decoration area 43, the first hold display area 46, and the second hold display area 48 are formed in the normal game state and the high probability state as shown in FIG. While being displayed, the first individual display area 45 and the second individual display area 47 are not displayed. Then, in both the case where the game turn is executed on the first special figure display unit 37a and the case where the game turn is executed on the second special figure display unit 37b, the variation display of the symbol is displayed in the decoration area 43. Is executed.

  Next, a description will be given of a processing configuration that enables the progress of the game as described above. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the special figure special power control process according to the present embodiment executed by the main MPU 82. In the present embodiment, since the game times on the first special figure display unit 37a and the game times on the second special figure display unit 37b are not performed in an overlapping manner, the game times on the first special figure display unit 37b are not repeated. The first special figure special power control processing and the second special figure special power control processing are not individually set, but a common special figure special power control processing is executed for both the first hold information and the second hold information. .

  In the special figure special power control process, first, a process of acquiring hold information is executed (step S3401). FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a process of acquiring the hold information. When a prize has occurred in the first operation port 33 (step S3501: YES), and the number of pieces of the first reservation information stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 is less than the upper limit storage number (step S3502). : YES), a process for acquiring the first suspension information is executed.

  In the process for acquiring the first hold information, first, the main MPU 82 provides the number of unprocessed first hold information stored in the first special figure holding area 125 in the main RAM 84. Then, the value of the first special figure suspension counter is incremented by 1 (step S3503). Incidentally, the display content of the first special figure reservation display section 37c in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the first special figure reservation counter. As a result, the display content of the first special figure suspension display section 37c corresponds to the number of the first suspension information stored in the first special figure suspension area 125.

  Thereafter, the values of the hit random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation area 125, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of storages to which 1 is added in step S3503 ( Step S3504). In the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot result is determined according to the content of the gaming state when the jackpot result is obtained. Since the type of the jackpot result is not determined by lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is provided. Not been. After that, a first hold command indicating that the first hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 (step S3505). The sound-light-side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first hold command to the display-side MPU 103, thereby displaying the number of the first hold information in the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41 to increase the number of hold. Let it be changed corresponding to.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3501, if a negative determination is made in step S3502, or if the processing in step S3505 is executed, a prize has been awarded to the special pitching apparatus 151 (step S3506: YES). If the number of pieces of second hold information stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is smaller than the upper limit storage number (step S3507: YES), a process for acquiring second hold information is executed.

  In the process for acquiring the second reservation information, first, the main MPU 82 is provided in the main RAM 84 so that the number of the unprocessed second reservation information stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 is grasped by the main MPU 82. The value of the second special figure holding counter is incremented by 1 (step S3508). Incidentally, the display content of the second special figure holding display section 37d in the special figure unit 37 is adjusted according to the value of the second special figure holding counter. As a result, the display content of the second special figure suspension display section 37d corresponds to the number of pieces of second suspension information stored in the second special figure suspension area 126.

  Thereafter, the respective values of the hit random number counter C1 and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation area 126, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages obtained by adding 1 in step S3508 ( Step S3509). Thereafter, the control process of the hold notification is executed (step S3510). Although details will be described later in the hold notification control process, the light emission mode of the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the currently obtained second hold information among the four light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is changed to the second hold state. A process is performed to set a light emission mode corresponding to the content of the information.

  After that, a second hold command indicating that the second hold information has increased is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 (step S3511). The sound-light-side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second hold command to the display-side MPU 103, and thereby displays the number of the second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41 to increase the number of hold information. Let it be changed corresponding to.

  Returning to the description of the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 56), after executing the processing of acquiring the hold information (step S3401), the special figure special power address table stored in the main ROM 83 is read (step S3402). In the special figure special power address table, a start address of a program for executing a process corresponding to the numerical information of the special figure special power counter provided in the main RAM 84 is set.

  After reading the special figure special power address table, the start address corresponding to the information of the special figure special power counter is acquired from the special figure special power address table (step S3403), and the process jumps to the process indicated by the acquired start address (step S3404). ). Specifically, when the value of the special figure special power counter is “0”, the special figure variation start process is executed (step S3405), and when the value of the special figure special power counter is “1”, the special figure special power counter is “1”. The processing during the fluctuation is executed (step S3406), and when the value of the special figure special power counter is “2”, the processing during the special figure determination is executed (step S3407), and when the value of the special figure special power counter is “3”. If so, a special power starting process is executed (step S3408). If the value of the special power special counter is "4", a special power opening process is executed (step S3409), and the value of the special power special counter is set to " If it is "5", a special power ending process is executed (step S3410). Among these processes, the processing contents of the special figure changing process in step S3406 and the special power releasing process in step S3409 are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the special figure change start processing in step S3405.

  In the special figure change start process, on the condition that either the first hold information or the second hold information is held (step S3601: YES), the second hold information is held in the second special figure hold area 126. It is determined whether or not it is stored (step S3602). If the second hold information is on hold (step S3602: YES), a data setting process for the second special figure is executed (step S3603).

  In the data setting process of the second special figure, the data stored in the first area 126a of the second special figure holding area 126 is moved to the execution area 127b for the second special figure. As a result, the start target of the current game round is the second special figure display section 37b. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second special figure holding area 126 is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d to the lower area side. The data in the first area 126a is cleared and the second area 126b → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first area 126a, the third area 126c → the second area 126b, the fourth area 126d → the third area 126c, and so on. Thereafter, the value of the second special figure hold counter of the main RAM 84 is decremented by one. As a result, the display content of the second special map suspension display section 37d is changed to the content in which the second suspension information is reduced by one. In other words, the state of each light emitting unit 155 in the second special figure reservation display unit 37d is shifted one by one to the left. Therefore, when the number of the second holding information held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 is reduced from four to three, the number of the light emitting units 155 in the light emitting state becomes four to three. When the number of the second holding information held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 decreases from three to two, the number of the light emitting units 155 in the light emitting state increases from three. When the number of light-emitting units 155 in the light-emitting state decreases to two, and the number of pieces of second hold information held and stored in the second special figure holding area 126 decreases from two to one, the number of light-emitting units 155 becomes two. From one to one, and from a state in which one piece of second reservation information is stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 to a state in which the second reservation information is not stored in the second special figure reservation area 126 Is set, one light emitting unit 155 is in a light emitting state. A state in which all of the light emitting portion 155 is in the off state. Further, in the data setting process, a second decrease command indicating that the second hold information in the second special figure holding area 126 has decreased by one is transmitted to the MPU 93 on the sound light side. The sound-light-side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received second decrease command to the display-side MPU 103 to display the number of the second hold information in the second hold display area 48 of the symbol display device 41 as the hold information. Make changes to accommodate the decrease in numbers.

  If the second hold information is not stored on the hold (step S3602: NO), data setting processing for the first special figure is executed (step S3604). In the data setting processing of the first special figure, the data stored in the first area 125a of the first special figure reservation area 125 is moved to the execution area 127a for the first special figure. As a result, the start target of the current game round is the first special map display section 37a. Thereafter, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first special figure reservation area 125 is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas 125a to 125d to the lower area side, and clears the data of the first area 125a and the second area 125b → The data in each area is shifted in the order of the first area 125a, the third area 125c → the second area 125b, the fourth area 125d → the third area 125c, and so on. Thereafter, the value of the first special figure reservation counter of the main RAM 84 is decremented by one. As a result, the display content of the first special figure suspension display section 37c is changed to the content in which the first suspension information is reduced by one. That is, the state of each light emitting unit 154 in the first special figure reservation display unit 37c is shifted one by one to the left. Therefore, when the number of pieces of the first hold information held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 is reduced from four to three, the number of light emitting units 154 in the light emitting state is changed from four to three. When the number of the first holding information held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 decreases from three to two, the number of the light emitting units 154 in the light emitting state increases from three. When the number decreases to two, and the number of pieces of the first holding information held and stored in the first special figure holding area 125 decreases from two to one, the number of the light emitting units 154 in the light emitting state becomes two. From one to one, and from a state in which one piece of first reservation information is reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 to a state where the first reservation information is not reserved and stored in the first special figure reservation area 125 Is set to indicate that one light emitting unit 154 is in a light emitting state. A state in which all of the light emitting portion 154 is in the off state. In the data setting process, a first decrease command indicating that the first hold information in the first special figure holding area 125 has decreased by one is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93. The sound-light-side MPU 93 transmits a command corresponding to the received first decrease-time command to the display-side MPU 103, thereby displaying the first hold information in the normal hold display area 42 or the first hold display area 46 of the symbol display device 41. The display of the number is changed according to the decrease in the number of pending information.

  Here, by executing the processing of step S3602, if the second hold information is held and stored, even if the first hold information is acquired earlier than the second hold information, the second hold information is obtained. The 2 hold information is the target of starting the game round. Thus, the execution of the game round on the second special figure display unit 37b can be prioritized over the execution of the game round on the first special figure display unit 37a. As described above, a small hit result may occur when the second hold information is the start target of the game round, whereas a small hit result is obtained when the first hold information is the target of the game round. Does not occur. In this case, it is more advantageous for the player that the second suspension information becomes the target of starting the game round than the first reservation information becomes the target of starting the game round. In this case, the game times in the second special figure display portion 37b are digested in preference to the game times in the first special figure display portion 37a, so that the priority is given to the second hold information that is advantageous to the player. As a result, it becomes possible to start the game round.

  When the processing in step S3603 or step S3604 is executed, a hit / fail determination processing is executed (step S3605). In the success / failure determination process, if the success / failure lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start of the game round is the first special figure display unit 37a, the low probability correctness table for the first special figure (see FIG. 55 (a)) is displayed. If the winning / rejection lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the start target of the game round is the first special figure display unit 37a, a high probability winning / failing table for the first special figure is read (see FIG. 55 (b)). Is read from the main ROM 83, and if the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the low probability mode and the start of the game round is the second special figure display portion 37b, a low probability correct / non-permissible table for the second special figure (see FIG. 55 (c)) ) Is read from the main-side ROM 83, and if the winning / rejecting lottery mode is the high probability mode and the start of the game round is the second special figure display section 37b, a high probability winning / failing table for the second special figure (FIG. 55 (d)) ) From the main ROM 83. After reading the hit / fail table, the hit / fail determination is performed based on the hold information stored in the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure which is the start target of the current game round. , That is, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1, and it is determined whether the read numerical information matches any of the numerical information set as the jackpot result in the hit / fail table. In addition, if the start target of the current game round is the second special figure display unit 37b, if the numerical information set as the big hit result does not match, the small hit result is set in the hit / fail table. It is determined whether or not any of the numerical information matches.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is a big hit result (step S3606: YES), “1” is set to the big hit flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3607). Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed (step S3608). In the stop result setting process, information of a pattern stop mode to be finally stopped and displayed on the special figure display units 37a and 37b, which is a start target of the current game round, is read from the main ROM 83, and the read information is read from the main ROM 83. It is stored in the RAM 84.

  If the result of the hit determination processing is not a big hit result but a small hit result (step S3609: YES), “1” is set to a small hit flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3610). As described above, the small hit result does not occur on the side of the first special figure display unit 37a, but occurs only on the side of the second special figure display unit 37b. Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the small hit result is executed (step S3611). More specifically, the information of the form of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the second special figure display portion 37b in the current game is read from the main ROM 83, and the read information is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern mode selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern mode selected in the case of the jackpot result.

  If the result of the success / failure determination process is neither the big hit result nor the small hit result (step S3609: NO), a stop result setting process for a miss result is executed (step S3612). Specifically, in the current game round, the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b is read from the main ROM 83, and the read information is read. It is stored in the main RAM 84. The information on the pattern aspect selected in this case is different from the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the jackpot result and the information on the pattern aspect selected in the case of the small hit result. One type is common to the special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b.

  When the processing of step S3608, step S3611, or step S3612 has been executed, a specific processing of the variable display period is executed (step S3613). In the process of specifying the variable display period, the variable display period table is read from the main ROM 83. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the game time to be started this time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. In this case, it is determined that a reach effect is to be generated if the current game start time corresponds to the jackpot result. In addition, even when the game times targeted for the start this time do not correspond to the jackpot result, the current game among the execution area 127a for the first special figure and the execution area 127b for the second special figure If the numerical information of the reach random number counter C3 stored on the side to be started is the numerical information corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach effect will occur. When it is determined that a reach effect is generated, the reach generation variable display period table stored in the main ROM 83 is read out from the main ROM 83, and when it is determined that no reach effect is generated, the reach display is stored in the main ROM 83. The variable display period table for reach non-occurrence is read from the main ROM 83. After that, the current numerical information of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained, and the fluctuation display period is determined by checking the fluctuation display period table that has already been read. Then, the information of the determined variable display period is set in a special figure special power timer counter provided in the main RAM 84.

  After that, the change command and the type command corresponding to the game time to be started this time are transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 (step S3614). The change command includes the information of the change display period specified in step S3613, and the game time to be started is displayed on either the first special figure display unit 37a or the second special figure display unit 37b. Information indicating whether or not they are supported is included. Further, the fluctuation command includes information on whether or not to execute a reach effect. If the variable display period is completely different between the situation where the reach effect is not performed and the situation where the reach effect is performed, the information directly indicating whether or not to execute the reach effect is a command for variation. It does not have to be set. Further, the fluctuation command includes information indicating whether or not the current gaming state is a high probability state. The type command includes information as to whether or not the game time to be started this time corresponds to the jackpot result.

  After that, in the first special figure display unit 37a and the second special figure display unit 37b, the display unit for which the current game round is to be started, the variable display of the pattern is started (step S3615). Then, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S3616). Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special figure fluctuation start processing is executed is “0”, the value of the special figure special power counter targeted for addition by adding 1 is changed to the special figure fluctuation processing. It will be the corresponding "1".

  FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the special figure fixing process in step S3407 in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 56).

  In the special figure special processing, the lottery is performed on condition that the final stop period set in the special figure changing processing in step S3406 in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 56) has elapsed (step S3701: YES). A mode monitoring process is executed (step S3702). In the lottery mode monitoring process, the value of the game number counter is subtracted by 1 on condition that the value of the game number counter provided in the main RAM 84 is 1 or more, and the value of the game number counter after the subtraction is 1 If it is "0", the value of the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 84 is cleared to "0". As described above, in the present embodiment, the high-probability state is continued until the one set is completed with one set of ten jackpot results, and the open / close execution mode based on the last jackpot result of one set ends. Is in a high probability state in which four game times are continued as an upper limit. In this case, the game number counter is a counter for specifying the number of continuations of the remaining game times in the high probability state by the main MPU 82. Then, the value of the game number counter is decremented by one each time the game number ends, and when the value of the game number counter after the subtraction becomes “0”, the value of the high probability flag is cleared to “0”. As a result, the gaming state shifts from the high probability state to the normal gaming state.

  After executing the lottery mode monitoring process, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the big hit flag of the main RAM 84 to determine whether or not the current game time corresponds to the big hit result. (Step S3703). If it corresponds to the jackpot result (step S3703: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the ongoing flag provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3704). The continuation flag is a flag used by the main MPU 82 to specify whether or not the set state in which the ten jackpot results are one set is continuing. When the continuation flag is not set to “1” (step S <b> 3704: NO), it means that the current jackpot result has occurred in the normal game state or the high probability state in which four game times are continued as an upper limit. In this case, the continuation flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3705), and the continuation counter provided in the main RAM 84 is set to "10" (step S3706). The continuation counter is a counter for the main MPU 82 to specify the number of remaining jackpot results that occur in the set state.

  After that, the information (specifically, 20 seconds) of the first opening period corresponding to the jackpot result as a start trigger of the set state is set in the special figure special power timer counter (step S3707). Then, the first opening command is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 (step S3708). As a result, an effect corresponding to the start of the open / close execution mode and the start of the set state is performed in the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65.

  When the continuation flag is set to “1” (step S3704: YES), it means that the current big hit result has occurred in the set state. In this case, the information (specifically, 10 seconds) of the second opening period corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result in the set state is set in the special figure special power timer counter (step S3709). Then, the second opening command is transmitted to the light-side MPU 93 (step S3710). Thereby, the effect corresponding to the start of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result or the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result in the set state is achieved by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit. At 65 is performed.

  If "1" is not set in the big hit flag of the main RAM 84 (step S3703: NO), it is determined whether or not "1" is set in the small hit flag of the main RAM 84, and this game is performed. It is determined whether the round corresponds to the small hit result (step S3711). If it corresponds to the small hit result (step S3711: YES), the information (specifically, 10 seconds) of the second opening period corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result in the set state is transmitted to the special figure special power timer. The value is set in the counter (step S3712). Then, the second opening command is transmitted to the sound-light-side MPU 93 (step S3713). Thereby, the effect corresponding to the start of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result or the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result in the set state is achieved by the symbol display device 41, the display light emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit. At 65 is performed.

  When the processing of step S3708, step S3710, or step S3713 is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by 1 (step S3714). Since the value of the special figure special power counter is “2” when the special figure special processing is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by “1” to “3” corresponding to the special power start processing (step S3408). ". On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3711, the value of the special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S3715). As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start processing (step S3405).

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the special power starting processing in step S3408 in the special power special power control processing (FIG. 56).

  If the opening period set in the special figure fixing process (FIG. 59) has elapsed (step S3801: YES), "1" is set to the value of the opening / closing counter SOC provided in the main RAM 84 (step S3801). Step S3802). The opening / closing frequency counter SOC is a counter for specifying the number of times the special power winning device 32 is opened in the current opening / closing execution mode by the main MPU 82. In this embodiment, the number of times the special power-winning device 32 is opened is set to one in both the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result and the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result.

  After that, a setting process of the maximum winning number is executed (step S3803). In the setting process, the information corresponding to the upper limit winning number is stored in the winning counter provided in the main RAM 84 in either the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result or the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result. Typically, "10") is set. Then, an opening continuation period setting process is executed (step S3804). In the setting process, the information of the open continuation period for the big hit (specifically, 29 seconds) is set in the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the big hit result, and in the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result. The information of the open duration for small hits (specifically, 1.8 seconds) is set. The open duration for the jackpot is set to a period longer than the product of the launch cycle of the game ball (specifically, 0.6 seconds) and the maximum winning number, and the open duration for the small hit is set to The period is set to be shorter than the product of the firing cycle (specifically, 0.6 seconds) and the maximum winning number.

  After that, a special power release setting process is executed (step S3805). In the opening setting process, data setting for setting the special power winning device 32 to an open state is performed. Thereby, the special power winning device 32 is in an open state. Thereafter, the value of the special figure special power counter is incremented by one. Since the value of the special figure special power counter when the special power special processing is executed is “3”, the value of the special figure special power counter is “4” corresponding to the special power open processing (step S3409) by adding one. It becomes.

  In the special power opening process (step S3409), the special power prize device 32 is closed when the currently set open continuation period has elapsed, or when the number of prizes to the special power prize device 32 has exceeded the upper limit prize number. The processing of is performed. When the special power winning device 32 is closed, the ending period is set in the special figure special power timer counter, and the ending command is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 93.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the special power ending processing in step S3410 in the special figure special power control processing (FIG. 56).

  If the ending period set in the special power opening processing (step S3409) has elapsed (step S3901: YES), the condition is that the current open / close execution mode is triggered by the jackpot result (step S3902: YES). The high probability flag of the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S3903). Thereafter, the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is decremented by 1 (step S3904). If the value of the continuation counter after the subtraction is “0” (step S3905: YES), the continuation flag of the main RAM 84 is reset. In addition to clearing "0" (step S3906), "4" is set to the number-of-games counter of the main RAM 84 (step S3907). As a result, after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode, a high-probability state is reached in which four game times are continued as an upper limit. After that, a special hold notification end process is executed (step S3908). In the end processing, a later-described special reservation notification flag of the main RAM 84 is cleared to “0”, and a later-described special notification target area of the second special figure reservation area 126 is cleared to “0”. The light emitting section 155 in the special light emitting state described later in the section 37d is set to the normal light emitting state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3902, if a negative determination is made in step S3905, or if the process of step S3908 is executed, the value of the special figure special power counter is cleared to "0" (step S3909). As a result, the value of the special figure special power counter becomes “0” corresponding to the special figure change start processing (step S3405).

  Next, the control process of the suspension notification executed in step S3510 in the suspension information acquisition process (FIG. 57) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the control processing of the suspension notification is executed when the second suspension information is newly acquired, and is not executed even when the first suspension information is newly acquired.

  In the suspension notification control process, it is determined whether or not the second suspension information acquired this time is suspension information that results in a jackpot in the high probability state (step S4001). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the second reservation information acquired this time, and the numerical information is referred to in a high probability state. It is determined whether or not it matches any of the numerical information of the jackpot result set in the table.

  If the acquired second suspension information is suspension information that results in a jackpot in the high-probability state (step S4001: YES), the currently acquired second suspension information among the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure suspension area 126 is displayed. 2 Set "1" to the jackpot hold flag provided in the area where the hold information is stored (step S4002). In the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the jackpot holding flag is provided in each of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure holding area 126, separately from the hit random number area and the reach random number area. However, unlike the first embodiment, the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d are not provided with the jackpot type area, the duration area, and the set flag. In addition, in each of the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special map reservation area 126, a special notification is provided as an area for specifying by the main MPU 82 that a special reservation notification to be described later is to be executed. A target area is provided. In the case where the second reservation information is to be a start of the game and the shift of the second reservation information stored in the first to fourth areas 126a to 126d of the second special figure reservation area 126 is executed, the winning random number area , The setting state of the reach random number area and the jackpot hold flag is shifted from the n-th area to the (n-1) -th area, and the setting state of the special notification target area is also shifted from the n-th area to the (n-1) -th area .

  When a negative determination is made in step S4001 or when the process of step S4002 is performed, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the special hold notification flag of the main RAM 84 (step S4003). The special suspension notification flag is a flag for specifying by the main MPU 82 that the light emission state of any one of the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure suspension display unit 37d is the special light emission state.

  In the present embodiment, when the second holding information corresponding to the big hit result or the small hit result is acquired in a set state in which 10 big hit results are set as one set, the light emitting unit 155 of the second special figure holding display unit 37d has the same. The light emitting state of the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second hold information may be a special light emitting state. Specifically, the second holding information acquired in a situation where the second holding information is not stored in the second special map holding area 126 corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result, and the execution condition of the special holding notification is When the condition is established, the leftmost light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the first second hold information among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d flashes as a special light emitting state. In addition, the second hold information acquired in the situation where one second hold information is stored in the second special map holding area 126 corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result, and the execution condition of the special hold notification is When the condition is established, the second light emitting unit 155 from the left corresponding to the second second hold information among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is turned on and off as a special light emitting state. In addition, the second hold information acquired in a situation where two pieces of second hold information are stored in the second special map holding area 126 corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result, and the execution condition of the special hold notification is When the condition is satisfied, the third light emitting unit 155 from the left corresponding to the third second hold information among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is turned on and off as a special light emitting state. In addition, the second hold information acquired in the situation where three pieces of second hold information are stored in the second special map holding area 126 corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result, and the execution condition of the special hold notification is When the condition is satisfied, the fourth light emitting unit 155 from the left corresponding to the fourth second hold information among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d blinks as a special light emitting state. In addition, in the case where any of the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure display section 37d is in the special light emitting state, when the game round of the second special figure display section 37b is newly started, the special light emitting state is set. If the light emitting unit 155 is the leftmost light emitting unit 155, the special light emitting state is released, and the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state is the second to fourth light emitting units 155 from the left. For example, the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state is shifted by one to the left. By confirming that any one of the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure holding display unit 37d is in the special light emitting state, the second holding information corresponding to the order of the light emitting units 155 in the special light emitting state is obtained. It is possible for the player to recognize that a big hit result or a small hit result occurs. Note that the special light emitting state is not limited to a configuration in which the light emitting unit 155 is turned on and off, and for example, a configuration in which the light emitting unit 155 is lit in a color different from that in a normal light emitting state other than the special light emitting state may be used. .

  If the special hold notification flag is set to “1” (step S4003: YES), the process for starting the new special hold notification after step S4004 is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the special suspension notification from being simultaneously executed in the plurality of light emitting units 155 of the second special figure suspension display unit 37d.

  If the special hold notification flag is not set to “1” (step S4003: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is 2 or more, so that the remaining jackpot result in the set state is determined. It is determined whether or not the number of occurrences is two or more (step S4004). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4004, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the jackpot hold flag corresponding to the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result exists in the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time (step S4005). If the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result already exists (step S4005: YES), the process for newly starting the special hold notification after step S4006 is not executed. Thereby, in the situation where the number of remaining occurrences of the jackpot result is two or more in the set state, the game start target is set earlier than the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 on which the special hold notification is executed. It is possible to prevent the jackpot result from being generated by using the second hold information that has changed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4005, it is determined whether the second hold information acquired this time is a big hit result or a small hit result in the high probability state (step S4006). Specifically, the numerical information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is read out of the second reservation information acquired this time, and the numerical information is referred to in a high probability state. It is determined whether any one of the numerical information of the big hit result or the small hit result set in the table matches.

  When the second hold information acquired this time corresponds to the big hit result or the small hit result (step S4006: YES), the special lottery execution lottery process is executed (step S4007). In the execution lottery process, the special hold notification table stored in the main ROM 83 is read out, and the numerical information of the lottery counter periodically updated in the main RAM 84 is read. Then, it is determined whether the numerical information of the lottery counter matches the numerical information set in the special hold notification table. If the special hold notification has been won (step S4008: YES), a special hold notification setting process is executed (step S4009). In the setting process, “1” is set to the special notification target area in the areas 126 a to 126 d in which the currently acquired second reservation information is stored among the first to fourth areas 126 a to 126 d of the second special map reservation area 126. At the same time, the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the currently acquired second hold information among the four light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is set to the special light emitting state. Thereafter, the special hold notification flag in the main RAM 84 is set to "1" (step S4010), and a special hold notification command is transmitted to the sound-side MPU 93 (step S4011). Upon receiving the special hold notification command, the sound-side MPU 93 causes the symbol display device 41, the display light-emitting unit 64, and the speaker unit 65 to execute an effect corresponding to the start of the special hold notification.

  The state of the special light emitting state is a state in which the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state is a target for starting the game, or the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results in the set state is not changed. It is released when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is started in a situation of one time. In this case, in the set state, a small hit result may occur with the second suspension information targeted for starting the game round earlier than the second suspension information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emission state. However, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the small hit result, the special light emitting state in the light emitting unit 155 is continued. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the special light emission state in the situation where the set state continues. In addition, when the open / close execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result is started and the special light emission state is released in a situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results in the set state is one, the light emission in the special light emission state is performed. The unit 155 switches to a normal light emitting state. This makes it possible to limit the execution period of the suspension notification to within the range of the set state.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4004 that the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is not 2 or more, it is determined in step S4012 whether the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is "1". That is, it is determined whether or not the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot result is one in the set state. If a negative determination is made in step S4012, the hold notification control process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent the special light emission state from being started in a state other than the set state.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4012, it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the jackpot hold flag corresponding to the second hold information acquired earlier than the second hold information acquired this time. Then, it is determined whether or not the second hold information acquired earlier than the currently acquired second hold information includes the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result (step S4013). If a negative determination is made in step S4013, the processing from step S4006 described above is executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4013, the processing of steps S4009 to S4011 described above is executed on the condition that the currently acquired second suspension information corresponds to the jackpot result (step S4014). As a result, the light emitting unit 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time enters the special light emission state.

  In other words, in the situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results is one in the set state and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly added. When the special light emission state is not set for the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result that has already been obtained, the special information is set for the second hold information corresponding to the newly obtained jackpot result. The light emission state is started. As a result, a jackpot result occurs and the set state ends with the second hold information targeted for starting the game round earlier than the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emission state. In this case, the jackpot result will surely occur in the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state. Therefore, it is possible to increase a player's expectation that the special light emission state is started in a situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results is one in the set state. In the set state, the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results is notified by the symbol display device 41, but the notification may not be executed.

  Next, the manner in which the suspension notification is executed will be described with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (h). FIG. 63 (a) shows the execution period of the game times, FIG. 63 (b) shows the period during which the set state is continued, and FIG. 63 (c) shows the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result. 63 (d) shows the execution period of the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result, and FIG. 63 (e) shows the period when the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is "1". FIG. 63 (f) shows a period during which one of the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d is in the special light emitting state, and FIG. 63 (g) shows that the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is FIG. 63 (h) shows the timing at which the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired.

  When the gaming round corresponding to the occurrence of the jackpot result ends at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the set state is started as shown in FIG. As shown in (1), the open / close execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is started. Thereafter, at the timing t2 when the open / close execution mode is being executed, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the second suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result is suspended and stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the currently acquired second hold information among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d enters the special light emitting state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is ended as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and a new game round is started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). In this case, since this game time is triggered by the second hold information acquired at the timing of t2, the special light emission state is released as shown in FIG. 63 (f), and as shown in FIG. 63 (g). , The second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is not held and stored.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a), and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is started as shown in FIG. 63 (c). Then, at the timing of t5, the opening / closing execution mode ends as shown in FIG. 63 (c), and a game round is newly started as shown in FIG. 63 (a).

  By acquiring the second suspension information corresponding to the small hit result at the timing of t6, which is a situation in which the game round is being executed, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the second special figure suspension display section 37d Of the light emitting units 155, the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the second hold information acquired this time enters the special light emitting state. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (a), the game time starts at the timing of t7, and the game time starts at the timing of the subsequent t8. Since the game time started at the timing of t8 is triggered by the second suspension information acquired at the timing of t6, at the timing of t9 when the game time ends, as shown in FIG. The opening / closing execution mode triggered by the result is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing t10 when the open / close execution mode is being executed, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired as shown in FIG. 63 (h). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the second suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result is suspended and stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the light emitting unit 155 corresponding to the currently acquired second hold information among the light emitting units 155 of the second special figure hold display unit 37d enters the special light emitting state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is ended as shown in FIG. 63 (d), and the game round is started as shown in FIG. 63 (a). Also, the game round is started at the timing of t12. As shown in FIG. 63 (h), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired at the timing of t13, which is the situation where the game round is being executed. However, at this time, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result obtained at the timing of t10 is still held and stored, and the special light emission state is set for the second hold information. No special light emission state is set for the second hold information.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t14, the game round ends as shown in FIG. Since the game time is triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the small hit result, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is started as shown in FIG. 63 (d). Then, the open / close execution mode ends at the timing of t15. At the timing of the time t15, the game round is started as shown in FIG. The game time is a game time triggered by the second suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired at the timing of t10. Accordingly, at the timing of the time t15, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state does not exist in the second special figure suspension display unit 37d. However, since the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired at the timing of t13 still exists, the period in which the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is held is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t16, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a), and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is started as shown in FIG. 63 (c). At time t17 when the open / close execution mode is being executed, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired as shown in FIG. 63 (h). However, at this time, since the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired at the timing of t13 is still on hold, the special emission state is not set for the second hold information acquired this time. Thereafter, at times t18 and t20, a game round corresponding to the jackpot result is started as shown in FIG. 63 (a), and at times t19 and t21, respectively, as shown in FIG. 63 (c). As shown, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (e), a situation in which the value of the continuation counter of the main RAM 84 is "1", that is, a situation in which the number of occurrences of the remaining big hit results in the set state is one. At the timing of t22, the game round is started as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 63 (h), the second suspension information corresponding to the jackpot result is acquired at the timing of t23, which is the situation where the game round is being executed. As a result, as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is held and stored. However, the special light emission state is not set for the second hold information because the execution of the special hold notification does not result in the special hold notification execution lottery process.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t24, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a), and the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is started as shown in FIG. 63 (d). At time t25 when the open / close execution mode is being executed, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired as shown in FIG. 63 (h). In this case, although the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is already held and stored as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the remaining jackpot results in the set state are set as shown in FIG. 63 (e). This is a situation where the number of occurrences is one. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 63 (f), the light emitting section 155 of the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result acquired at the timing of t25 enters the special light emitting state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t26, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the small hit result is ended as shown in FIG. 63 (d), thereby starting the game round as shown in FIG. 63 (a). Further, at the timing of t27, the game round is started as shown in FIG. The game time ends at the timing t28, and at the timing t28, the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result is started as shown in FIG. 63 (c). Then, the open / close execution mode ends at the timing of t29. Thus, the open / close execution mode corresponding to the last jackpot result in the set state ends. Therefore, the current set state ends as shown in FIG. Further, at the timing of t29, the special light emission state for the second hold information ends as shown in FIG. 63 (f).

  Further, at the timing of t29, the game round is started as shown in FIG. The game time is a game time triggered by the second hold information acquired at the timing of t25. Thereafter, at the timing of t30, the game round ends as shown in FIG. 63 (a), and as shown in FIG. 63 (c), the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot results from the timing of t30 to the timing of t31. Be executed.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  If the jackpot result does not occur in response to the second hold information targeted for execution of the game before the second hold information targeted for execution of the special light emission state, the execution target of the special light emission state While the jackpot result or the small hit result is given with the second hold information being a trigger, the game round is executed before the second hold information that is the special light emission state execution target. If a jackpot result occurs in response to the second held information, the jackpot result is given in response to the second held information targeted for execution of the special light emission state. Thereby, when the special light emission state occurs, the player is triggered by the second hold information that is the execution target of the game times before the second hold information that is the execution target of the special light emission state It is expected that a jackpot result will be given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even if the jackpot result does not occur with the second hold information targeted for execution of the game before the second hold information targeted for execution of the special light emission state, even if the jackpot result or the small jackpot does not occur. Since the result is provided, even in this case, it is possible to prevent the player's attention level from decreasing for the second hold information targeted for execution of the special light emission state.

  In the situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results is one in the set state and the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been obtained, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly obtained If the special light emission state is not set for the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result already acquired, the special light emission state is set for the second hold information corresponding to the newly acquired jackpot result. Is started. As a result, a jackpot result occurs and the set state ends with the second hold information targeted for starting the game round earlier than the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emission state. In this case, the jackpot result will surely occur in the game times triggered by the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emitting state. Therefore, it is possible to increase a player's expectation that the special light emission state is started in a situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results is one in the set state.

  In the situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results is two or more in the set state, the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result or the small hit result in a situation where the second hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been obtained. Is not acquired, the special emission state is not set for the newly acquired second hold information. Thus, the situation in which an event that results in a jackpot occurs with the second hold information targeted for execution of the game before the second hold information in the special light emission state occurs in the set state, It is possible to limit the number of occurrences of the jackpot result to one. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the situation where the number of occurrences of the remaining jackpot results is one in the set state.

<Another form of the sixth embodiment>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of the sixth embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following another embodiment may be individually applied to the configuration of the sixth embodiment, or may be applied in combination.

  In the opening / closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot result, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the round game is executed only once, but may be a configuration in which the round game is executed two or more times. In this case, it is possible to further increase the advantage of the open / close execution mode triggered by the big hit result with respect to the open / close execution mode triggered by the small hit result.

  Although the special light emitting state is not simultaneously generated in the plurality of light emitting units 155, a configuration in which the special light emitting state may be simultaneously generated in the plurality of light emitting units 155 may be employed instead. In this case, if the second hold information corresponding to the light emitting unit 155 in the special light emission state firstly corresponds to the jackpot result, the second hold information to be executed first for the game is later set. By configuring the second hold information to be executed to also correspond to the jackpot result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the special light emission state in the plurality of light emitting units 155 simultaneously.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the special suspension notification is executed in the second special figure suspension display unit 37d, a configuration in which the special suspension notification is executed in the symbol display device 41 may be adopted. For example, in a configuration in which the number of reserved images corresponding to the number of reserved information is displayed on the symbol display device 41, a configuration may be adopted in which special reserved notification is executed based on the content of the reserved display image.

  -When the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is newly acquired in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result has already been acquired, a special hold notification dedicated to the jackpot result may be executed. As a result, when the special hold notification is executed, it is determined that a plurality of jackpot results are generated. Therefore, it is possible to increase a player's attention to whether or not the special hold notification is executed. Becomes possible.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of the following another embodiment may be individually applied to the configuration of each of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. Further, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other (for example, a combination of the first embodiment and the fifth embodiment, a second embodiment, a fourth embodiment, and a sixth embodiment). Combinations of the embodiments), the configurations of the above embodiments may be combined with each other, and the following configurations of the other embodiments may be applied individually or in combination.

  Instead of the configuration in which the display control device 101 is controlled by the sound emission control device 91 based on a command output from the main control device 71, the display control device 101 is controlled based on a command output from the main control device 71. May control the sound emission control device 91. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 91 and the display control device 101 are separately provided, a configuration in which both control devices are provided as one control device may be adopted. May be integrated in the main control device 71, and both functions of both control devices may be integrated in the main control device 71. Further, the configuration of a command output from the main control device 71 to the audio emission control device 91 and the configuration of a command output from the audio emission control device 91 to the display control device 101 are also arbitrary.

  The device in which the effect for the game is executed is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and the effect for the game can be executed by operating a movable member provided in a movable manner. The effect for the game round may be executed by lighting a predetermined light emitting unit, or the effect for the game round may be executed by a combination of all or a part of the above aspects.

  -Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which a special action device opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific region of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific region of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that is a jackpot when a right is generated and a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an arrangement ball machine, and a sparrow ball provided with another accessory.

  In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable / closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses and the like, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses and the like.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry section (a function of executing the processing of steps S504 and S604 in the main MPU 82);
An assignment determining unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S705 to S709 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether the special information corresponds to the assignment correspondence information;
A privilege granting means (step S1204 in the main MPU 82) for granting a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination being a result of the grant corresponding to the special information corresponding to the grant corresponding information. To execute the process of step S1208);
The game replay operation is started, and the end of the game replay operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is defined as one of the game times, and the game replay operation is performed in each game time. Game time control means (a function of executing the special figure change start processing, the special figure change processing, and the special figure determination processing in the main MPU 82);
In gaming machines equipped with
In the game area, at least a first starting ball entry portion (first operation port 33) and a second starting ball entry portion (second operation port 34) are provided as the starting ball entry portion,
The providing determination unit performs the providing determination on the first special information obtained based on a game ball having entered the first starting ball-in unit, and playing a game ball in the second starting ball-in unit. Is configured to perform the above-described determination on the second special information acquired based on the entry of the ball,
The game time control means includes at least a part of a period during which the game time triggered by the first special information is executed, and at least one of a period during which the game time triggered by the second special information is executed. It is a configuration that can overlap the part,
In the gaming machine, when the first correspondence information that is the first special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is acquired, and the second correspondence information that is the second special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is acquired. In the adjusting means, the timing of execution between the game time triggered by the first correspondence information and the game time triggered by the second correspondence information is set to a predetermined relationship. A game machine having a function of executing a setting process).

  According to the feature A1, the game time triggered by the first special information and the game time triggered by the second special information can be executed in an overlapping manner, so that the overall execution frequency of the game time can be increased. It becomes. In this case, when the first correspondence information that is the first special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is acquired and the second correspondence information that is the second special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is acquired, the first correspondence information is obtained. The relationship between the execution times of the game times triggered by the game and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information is a predetermined relationship. As a result, each of the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information are generated according to a certain rule, and the relative execution timing of each game time is preferable. It becomes possible.

  Feature A2. The adjusting means adjusts the duration of the game times so that the relationship between the execution times of the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information is a predetermined relationship. The gaming machine according to feature A1, characterized in that:

  According to the feature A2, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described in the above-described feature A1 only by adjusting the duration of the game times.

  Feature A3. The adjusting means is a game time triggered by the first special information, the game time being started earlier than the game time triggered by the first correspondence information, and the second special information. By adjusting the duration of at least one of the game times, which is a game time and is started earlier than the game time triggered by the second correspondence information, the first correspondence information is used as an opportunity. The gaming machine according to features A1 or A2, wherein the relationship between the execution times of the game times and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information is a predetermined relationship.

  According to the feature A3, the duration of the game time started before the game time triggered by the first correspondence information or the game time started before the game time triggered by the second correspondence information is adjusted. With this configuration, it is possible to easily make the relationship between the execution times of the game times triggered by the first correspondence information and the game times triggered by the second correspondence information a predetermined relationship.

  Feature A4. The adjusting means is configured to execute the first special information, which is an opportunity to execute a game round earlier than the first correspondence information, when the first special information corresponds to the additional correspondence information, and to execute the game round earlier than the second correspondence information. In at least one of the cases where the second special information as a trigger corresponds to the assignment correspondence information, execution of a game round triggered by the first correspondence information and a game round triggered by the second correspondence information The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein a predetermined process for causing a timing relationship to be a predetermined relationship is not performed.

  According to the feature A4, when the first correspondence information is acquired in a situation where the first special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is already acquired, or when the second special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is already acquired. If the second correspondence information is acquired in a situation where the adjustment is made, the adjustment by the adjustment unit is not performed. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effect as described in the feature A1 above without affecting the execution timing of other special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information.

Feature A5. A plurality of types of the assignment correspondence information are set,
The adjusting unit may change the predetermined relationship according to at least one of a type of the assignment corresponding information corresponding to the first correspondence information and a type of the assignment correspondence information corresponding to the second correspondence information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4.

  According to the feature A5, according to at least one of the first correspondence information and the second correspondence information, the execution timing of the game time triggered by the first correspondence information and the game time triggered by the second correspondence information Is changed. Thereby, it is possible to set the relative execution timing of each game round to a preferable one according to the type of the corresponding information.

Feature A6. The first special information and the second special information in a situation where a game round is executed, which is one of the first special information and the second special information and is triggered by the special information corresponding to the assignment corresponding information. (2) When the game round triggered by the other special information out of the special information is started, means for preventing the other special information from being treated as the assignment corresponding information (executing the process of step S704 in the main MPU 82) Function),
As the provision correspondence information, first provision correspondence information corresponding to provision of a privilege with a relatively high advantage of the player and second provision correspondence information corresponding to provision of a privilege with a relatively low advantage of the player And are set,
The adjustment unit is triggered by the first correspondence information when the first correspondence information corresponds to the first assignment correspondence information and the second correspondence information corresponds to the second assignment correspondence information. The execution timing of these game times is set to have a predetermined relationship so that the game times triggered by the second correspondence information can be started in a situation where the game times are being executed. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A5.

  According to the feature A6, the second special corresponding to the second assignment corresponding information having a relatively low advantage due to the game round triggered by the first special information corresponding to the first assignment corresponding information having a relatively high degree of advantage. It becomes possible to invalidate the game times triggered by the information.

Feature A7. The first special information and the second special information in a situation where a game round is executed, which is one of the first special information and the second special information and is triggered by the special information corresponding to the assignment corresponding information. (2) When the game round triggered by the other special information out of the special information is started, means for preventing the other special information from being treated as the assignment corresponding information (executing the process of step S704 in the main MPU 82) Function),
As the provision correspondence information, first provision correspondence information corresponding to provision of a privilege with a relatively high advantage of the player and second provision correspondence information corresponding to provision of a privilege with a relatively low advantage of the player And are set,
The adjusting means, when the first correspondence information corresponds to the first assignment correspondence information and the second correspondence information corresponds to the first assignment correspondence information, triggers one of the correspondence information The characteristics A1 to A6 are characterized in that the relationship of the execution timings of these game times is set to a predetermined relationship so that the game times triggered by the other game times are not started in the situation where the game times are executed. A gaming machine according to any one of the preceding claims.

  According to the feature A7, the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the first assignment corresponding information having a relatively high degree of advantage and the second special corresponding to the first assignment corresponding information having a relatively high degree of advantage are triggered. It is possible to prevent one of the game times triggered by the information from being invalidated by the other.

Feature A8. The adjusting means,
The continuation period of the game time that is a game time triggered by the first special information and that is started earlier than the game time triggered by the first correspondence information is determined by the fact that the first correspondence information is acquired. A first adjustment unit (a function of executing a process of steps S1302 to S1308 in the main MPU 82) for executing a first adjustment process for performing adjustment based on the first adjustment unit;
The duration of the game round triggered by the second special information and started before the game round triggered by the second correspondence information is determined by the fact that the second correspondence information is acquired. Second adjusting means for executing a second adjustment process for performing adjustment based on the function (the function of executing the processes of steps S1309 to S1315 in the main MPU 82);
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A7, comprising:

  According to the feature A8, the duration of the game round triggered by the first special information is adjusted based on the acquisition of the first correspondence information, and the second special time is adjusted based on the acquisition of the second correspondence information. The duration of the game round triggered by the information is adjusted. Thereby, as compared with a configuration in which only one of the game times triggered by the first special information and the game times triggered by the second special information is adjusted, the game triggered by the first correspondence information is performed. It is easy to make an adjustment so that the relationship between the execution timing and the game timing triggered by the second correspondence information becomes a predetermined relationship.

Feature A9. The first adjustment unit performs the first adjustment process based on the acquisition of the first correspondence information, regardless of whether the second correspondence information is acquired,
The feature A8 is characterized in that the second adjustment unit executes the second adjustment process based on the acquisition of the second correspondence information, regardless of whether the first correspondence information has been acquired. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature A9, the first adjustment processing is executed regardless of whether the second correspondence information is acquired based on the acquisition of the first correspondence information, and the first correspondence processing is executed based on the acquisition of the second correspondence information. Since the second adjustment process is executed irrespective of whether or not information is acquired, it is possible to simplify the process for specifying the execution timing of each adjustment process.

  Note that any one or a plurality of configurations among the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4 are applied to the configurations of the features A1 to A9. Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry section (the function of executing the processing of steps S1904 and S2003 in the main MPU 82);
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S2105 to S2109 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the addition correspondence information;
A first privilege granting unit (primary side) for granting a first privilege to the player based on a result of the grant determination indicating that the special information corresponds to the grant corresponding information. A function of executing the process of step S2307 in the MPU 82);
The game replay operation is started, and the end of the game replay operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is defined as one of the game times, and the game replay operation is performed in each game time. Game time control means (a function of executing the special figure change start processing, the special figure change processing, and the special figure determination processing in the main MPU 82);
Transition means (function of executing the processing of steps S2503 and S2504 in the main MPU 82) for transitioning to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player;
Terminating means for terminating the advantageous game state after the number of executions of the game times reaches the termination reference number in the advantageous game state (a function of executing the processing of steps S2302 to S2305 in the main MPU 82);
Special notification control such that the special notification corresponding to the content of the predetermined special information obtained by the special information obtaining means is executed at a timing before the predetermined special information is subjected to the assignment determination. Means (a function of executing a hold command selection process in the main MPU 82 and a function of executing a hold command corresponding process in the display MPU 103);
With
The special notification control means is configured to determine one of the number of game times executed in the advantageous game state and the number of remaining game times required to reach the end reference number in the advantageous game state. A gaming machine comprising a content adjusting means (a function of executing the processing of step S2707 in the main MPU 82) for making the execution content of the special notification different as at least one criterion.

  According to the feature B1, even if the game mode shifts to the advantageous game state, if the number of executions of the game times reaches the end reference number in the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state ends. Thus, in the advantageous game state, the game is performed while being aware of the remaining number of times of the advantageous game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In this case, the special notification corresponding to the content of the special information is executed at a timing before the special information becomes a target of the assignment determination. This allows the player to predict the contents of the special information before the game round triggered by the special information is started. Furthermore, the execution content of the special notification is different using the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state as at least one criterion. As a result, it is possible to associate the content of the special notification with the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the special notification.

Feature B2. The assignment determination unit has at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the assignment correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the assignment correspondence information is relatively high or low, as the determination mode. And
The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the advantageous gaming state is a gaming state in which the determination mode is the high probability mode.

  According to the feature B2, even if the mode is shifted to the high-probability mode, the high-probability mode ends when the number of executions of the game times reaches the end reference number in the high-probability mode. As a result, the game is played in the high probability mode while being aware of the remaining number of continuations of the high probability mode, and the interest of the game can be improved. In this case, the special notification corresponding to the content of the special information is executed at a timing before the special information becomes a target of the assignment determination. This allows the player to predict the contents of the special information before the game round triggered by the special information is started. Furthermore, the execution content of the special notification differs with the remaining continuation number of the high probability mode being at least one criterion. This makes it possible to associate the content of the special notification with the remaining continuation number of the high-probability mode, thereby increasing the degree of attention to the special notification.

Feature B3. In the game area, at least a first starting ball entry portion (first operation port 33) and a second starting ball entry portion (second operation port 34) are provided as the starting ball entry portion,
The providing determination unit performs the providing determination on the first special information obtained based on a game ball having entered the first starting ball-in unit, and playing a game ball in the second starting ball-in unit. Is configured to perform the above-described determination on the second special information acquired based on the entry of the ball,
The special notification control means, based on the fact that at least one of the first special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information and the second special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information has been obtained, So that special announcements are made,
The gaming machine according to the feature B1 or B2, wherein the content adjusting unit changes execution content of the special notification according to the number of times of the trigger at the timing when the trigger information is acquired.

  According to the feature B3, in the configuration in which the first special information and the second special information are separately acquired, the special notification is triggered by the acquisition of the first special information or the second special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information. Is started and the special notification is executed in a state associated with the remaining number of continuations of the advantageous game state. Therefore, when the special notification is executed, the first special notification is executed within the remaining continuation number of the high probability mode. It becomes possible for the player to recognize which of the game times triggered by the information and the game times triggered by the second special information should be digested.

Feature B4. Priority means (in the main MPU 82 for specifying the variable display period in the main MPU 82, the game times triggered by the second special information are more easily digested than the game times triggered by the first special information in the advantageous game state. Function to perform)
The game according to Feature B3, wherein the content adjusting unit changes execution content of the special notification according to the number of times of the trigger at a timing when the first special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is acquired. Machine.

  According to the feature B4, in the advantageous game state, the game time triggered by the second special information is more easily digested than the game time triggered by the first special information. , A number of game times will be executed. In this case, the special notification is executed in response to the acquisition of the first special information corresponding to the assignment corresponding information, and the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state at the timing when the first special information is acquired is determined. Therefore, the execution content of the special notification is different. In this way, the situation where the game times triggered by the second special information are preferentially consumed should be continued as it is, or the game times triggered by the second special information are prevented from being executed to correspond to the assignment corresponding information. It is possible to make the player recognize whether or not the game round triggered by the first special information should be executed.

  Feature B5. At least when the second special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state, a second privilege granting means for granting a second privilege to the player (a function of executing the processing of step S2309 in the main MPU 82) The gaming machine according to Feature B4, comprising:

  According to the feature B5, even if the second special information does not correspond to the addition corresponding information in the configuration in which the number of game times triggered by the second special information is executed in the advantageous game state, the second special information corresponds to the predetermined corresponding information. As a result, the second privilege is given to the player. In this case, it is more advantageous for the player to execute a large number of game rounds triggered by the second special information in the advantageous game state. On the other hand, when the first special information corresponding to the provision correspondence information is acquired in the advantageous game state, it is advantageous for the player that the game time triggered by the first special information is executed in the advantageous game state. It becomes. In this case, the special notification is executed in response to the acquisition of the first special information corresponding to the assignment corresponding information, and the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state at the timing when the first special information is acquired is determined. Due to the difference in the execution contents of the special notification in relation to the above, through the execution contents of the special notification, the game time triggered by any special information is executed within the range of the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state. This makes it possible for the player to recognize what should be done.

Feature B6. The game time control means includes at least a part of a period during which the game time triggered by the first special information is executed, and at least one of a period during which the game time triggered by the second special information is executed. It is a configuration that can overlap the part,
The priority means, in the advantageous gaming state, a game time triggered by the second special information not corresponding to the grant corresponding information is better than a game time triggered by the first special information not corresponding to the grant corresponding information The gaming machine according to feature B4 or B5, wherein the duration of the game times is also shortened.

  According to the feature B6, since the game time triggered by the first special information and the game time triggered by the second special information are executed in an overlapping manner, the number of executions of the game times per unit time is increased. Becomes possible. In addition, in the advantageous gaming state, the duration of the game times of the game times triggered by the second special information not corresponding to the provision correspondence information is longer than the game times triggered by the first special information not corresponding to the provision correspondence information. Since the time is shorter, the number of game times triggered by the second special information in the advantageous game state is easily consumed. In addition, even if the game time triggered by the second special information is easily digested in the advantageous game state, the game time triggered by the first special information and the second special information are triggered as described above. Since the game times described above are executed in an overlapping manner, the game times triggered by the first special information are also executed in the advantageous game state. In this case, the special notification is executed in response to the acquisition of the first special information corresponding to the assignment corresponding information, and the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state at the timing when the first special information is acquired is determined. Due to the difference in the execution content of the special notification in relation to the above, the player can determine which special information should be executed as a game time within the range of the remaining number of times of the advantageous game state. Can be recognized.

Feature B7. The content adjusting means,
Regardless of the number of executions of the game times triggered by the second special information, the number of times of the trigger at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the assignment corresponding information is acquired is the first number of times. If the number of game times triggered by the information is the number of times that can be started in the current advantageous game state, a first content adjustment means (step S2712 in the main MPU 82) to execute the first special notification as the special notification Function of executing the processing of step S2807 in the display side MPU 103), and
When the number of times of the trigger at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the assignment corresponding information is acquired is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times of execution of the game times triggered by the second special information, the first special If the number of game times triggered by the information is the number of times the current advantageous game state cannot be started, a second content adjusting means (step S2710 in the main MPU 82) for executing a second special notification as the special notification Function of executing the processing of step S2804 in the display-side MPU 103);
The gaming machine according to Feature B6, comprising:

  According to the feature B7, when the first special notification is executed, the game time triggered by the second special information is started before the game time triggered by the first special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is started. It is possible for the player to recognize as much digestion as possible. On the other hand, when the second special information is executed, the game time triggered by the second special information is executed such that the game time triggered by the first special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is executed in the advantageous gaming state. The player can recognize that the number of executions should be adjusted. Thereby, it becomes possible to make the mode of the shooting operation of the game ball different according to the content of the special notification.

Feature B8. The first content adjustment means is configured to execute, as the first special notification, a notification that allows a player to recognize that a firing operation aimed at acquiring the second special information should be continued,
The second content adjustment means is triggered by the second special information for starting a game round triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the high probability state as the second special notification. The gaming machine according to Feature B7, wherein a notification is made to allow the player to recognize the upper limit number of times of execution of the game times.

  According to the feature B8, the player who has confirmed the first special information will continue the firing operation aiming at the acquisition of the second special information, and the player who has confirmed the second special information will have the second special information corresponding to the corresponding information. The number of executions of the game times triggered by the second special information is adjusted so that the game times triggered by the first special information are executed in the advantageous game state. This makes it possible to increase the degree of importance of the special notification and increase the degree of attention to the special notification.

Feature B9. The granting correspondence information includes first granting correspondence information for setting a gaming state after the first privilege is provided to the advantageous gaming state, and a second providing for the gaming state after granting the first privilege to the advantageous gaming state. And the corresponding information is set,
The first content adjusting means may determine whether the number of times of the trigger at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is acquired is the number of times the number of times of execution of the game is triggered by the second special information If the number of game times triggered by the first special information is the number of times the game can be started in the current advantageous gaming state, the first special information corresponds to the first assignment corresponding information. Prevents the first special notification from being executed, and executes the first special notification when the first special information corresponds to the second assignment correspondence information. The gaming machine according to B7 or B8.

  According to the feature B9, when the first special information corresponds to the second assignment corresponding information, the first special notification is executed. As a result, in the situation where the advantageous game state cannot be continued, the game times triggered by the second special information should be consumed as much as possible so that more profit is given to the player until then. To the player. On the other hand, if the first special information corresponds to the first assignment corresponding information, the first special notification is not executed. As a result, a situation in which a game round triggered by the first special information corresponding to the first assignment corresponding information is not executed due to a large number of game rounds triggered by the second special information. The occurrence can be prevented from being triggered by the execution of the first special notification.

  Feature B10. The second content adjustment unit may be configured such that the number of times of the trigger at the timing when the first special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is acquired is such that the number of times of execution of the game times triggered by the second special information is equal to or more than a predetermined number of times. In some cases, if the number of game times triggered by the first special information is a number that cannot be started in the current advantageous gaming state, the first special information corresponds to the additional information in the advantageous gaming state. The second special notification is executed when the second special notification is executed, and when the first special information corresponds to the grant corresponding information even in a gaming state other than the advantageous gaming state, the second special notification is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features B7 to B9, wherein notification is not performed.

  According to the feature B10, the second special notification is executed when the first special information corresponds to the provision correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the first special information should be used as an opportunity to execute a game in the advantageous game state. On the other hand, if the first special information corresponds to the provision correspondence information even in the gaming state other than the advantageous gaming state, it is assumed that the first special information has triggered the execution of the game round after the end of the advantageous gaming state. Will also be given the first privilege. In this case, since the first special information does not need to be executed in the current advantageous gaming state, by preventing the second special notification from being executed in such a situation, it is possible to reduce the necessity of execution. It is possible to prevent the second special notification from being executed.

Feature B11. A variable ball entry means (special winning device 32) configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Opening / closing control means for executing opening / closing control for switching the variable ball input means to the closed state and then to the closed state (executing special power start processing, special power open processing, special power closed processing and small hit processing in the main MPU 82) Function) and
With
The first privilege granting means shifts a game state to a specific game state in which the opening / closing control is performed by the opening / closing control means as the grant of the first privilege, and changes a gaming state after the end of the specific game state to the first gaming state. It can be a gaming state different from the gaming state before the start of the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine shifts the gaming state to a predetermined gaming state in which the opening / closing control is performed by the opening / closing control means, at least when the second special information corresponds to the predetermined correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state. The game state after the end of the predetermined game state is provided with means for maintaining the game state before the opening / closing control is executed (the function of executing the processing of steps S2309 and S2601 to S2611 in the main MPU 82).
The one of the characteristics B4 to B10, wherein the game time control means prevents the game time from being executed in the specific game state, and allows the game time to be executed in the predetermined game state. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature B11, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the specific game state when the specific game state is being executed by preventing the game times from being executed in the specific game state. On the other hand, in the predetermined game state, the game times can be executed, so that the digestion rate of the game times can be increased.

  Feature B12. When a game round triggered by the second special information is started in a situation where the game round triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is being executed, the second special information is assigned to the grant. The gaming machine according to Feature B11, further comprising a unit (a function of executing the process of Step S2104 in the main MPU 82) so as not to be treated as correspondence information.

  According to the feature B12, it is possible to prevent the specific game state from being duplicated with the second special information as a trigger in a situation where the specific game state is being executed with the first special information as a trigger. .

  Feature B13. In a situation where a game round triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is being executed and in a situation where the predetermined game state is being executed, a game round triggered by the first special information is started. The gaming machine according to Feature B11 or B12, wherein the first special information is configured to be handled as the assignment correspondence information.

  According to the feature B13, the first special information corresponding to the provision correspondence information is based on the fact that the game round triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is being executed or the predetermined game state. This makes it possible to prevent the information from being treated as the assignment correspondence information.

  Feature B14. At least the duration of the game times triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information in the advantageous gaming state is triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information in at least the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B11 to B13, wherein the period is set to be equal to or longer than a total period of the duration of the game times and the execution period of the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature B14, the game time triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information or the game time triggered by the first special information corresponding to the added correspondence information in a situation where the predetermined game state is being executed. Is started, the game round triggered by the first special information ends after the predetermined game state ends. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined game state and the specific game state from being executed in an overlapping manner.

  In addition, even if any one or a plurality of configurations among the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4 are applied to the configurations of the features B1 to B14. Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A starting ball entry portion (first operation port 33, second operation port 34) into which game balls flowing down the game area can enter,
A variable ball entry means (special winning device 32) configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Opening / closing control means for executing opening / closing control for switching the variable ball input means to the closed state and then to the closed state (executing special power start processing, special power open processing, special power closed processing and small hit processing in the main MPU 82) Function) and
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry section (the function of executing the processing of steps S1904 and S2003 in the main MPU 82);
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the processing of steps S2105 to S2109 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the addition correspondence information;
The game replay operation is started, and the end of the game replay operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is defined as one of the game times, and the game replay operation is performed in each game time. Game time control means (a function of executing the special figure change start processing, the special figure change processing, and the special figure determination processing in the main MPU 82);
Based on the result of the giving determination being that the special information corresponds to the giving corresponding information, that the giving information corresponds to the giving corresponding information, after the game round operation is completed, the opening / closing by the opening / closing control means is performed. A specific shifting unit (a function of executing the process of step S2307 in the main MPU 82) for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state in which the control is executed;
Based on the result of the grant determination being the grant corresponding result, the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state can be a gaming state different from the gaming state before the start of the specific gaming state. Changing means (the function of executing the processing of steps S2502 to S2506 in the main MPU 82);
Even if the result of the grant determination is not the result of the grant, based on the satisfaction of the specific condition, the state is shifted to a predetermined game state in which the opening / closing control by the opening / closing control means is executed, A game state after the end of the game state, a specific setting unit (a function of executing steps S2309 and S2601 to S2611 in the main MPU 82) for maintaining the game state before the predetermined game state is executed;
With
In the game area, at least a first starting ball entry portion (first operation port 33) and a second starting ball entry portion (second operation port 34) are provided as the starting ball entry portion,
The providing determination unit performs the providing determination on the first special information obtained based on a game ball having entered the first starting ball-in unit, and playing a game ball in the second starting ball-in unit. Is configured to perform the above-described determination on the second special information acquired based on the entry of the ball,
The game time control means is configured to overlap a period in which the game time triggered by the first special information is executed and a period in which the game time triggered by the second special information is executed. Yes,
In the predetermined game state that is triggered by one of the first special information and the second special information, a game triggered by the other of the first special information and the second special information is triggered. A gaming machine characterized in that the number of times can be executed.

  According to the feature C1, in a predetermined gaming state generated by one of the first special information and the second special information, a game round triggered by the other of the first special information and the second special information can be executed. . As a result, it becomes possible to increase the digestion rate of the game times, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. The assignment determination unit has at least a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability of the assignment correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the assignment correspondence information is relatively high or low, as the determination mode. And
The changing means may set the determination mode after the end of the specific game state to a mode different from before the start of the specific game state,
The gaming machine according to claim C1, wherein the specific setting unit maintains the determination mode after the end of the predetermined gaming state in a mode before the execution of the predetermined gaming state.

  According to the feature C2, in the configuration in which the determination mode can be changed when the specific game state is executed and the determination mode is not changed when the predetermined game state is executed, the excellent effect as described above can be obtained. It is possible to play.

  Feature C3. In the specific game state triggered by one of the first special information and the second special information, the game turn control means triggers the other special information of the first special information and the second special information. The gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, wherein the gaming round is prevented from being executed.

  According to the feature C3, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the specific game state when the specific game state is being executed by preventing the game times from being executed in the specific game state.

  Feature C4. The first special information and the second special information in a situation where a game round is executed, which is one of the first special information and the second special information and is triggered by the special information corresponding to the assignment corresponding information. (2) When a game round triggered by the other special information out of the special information is started, means for preventing the other special information from being treated as the assignment correspondence information (executing the process of step S2104 in the main MPU 82) The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, comprising:

  According to the feature C4, in a situation where the specific game state is being executed with one of the first special information and the second special information as a trigger, the other special information of the first special information and the second special information is executed. As a trigger, it is possible to prevent the specific game state from occurring repeatedly.

  Feature C5. Either the situation where the game corresponding to the satisfaction of the specific condition is being executed or the situation where the predetermined game state is being executed, triggered by one of the first special information and the second special information. In one situation, when the game round triggered by the other special information of the first special information and the second special information is started, the other special information can be treated as the assignment corresponding information. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, wherein

  According to the feature C5, the special information corresponding to the provision correspondence information is provided as the provision correspondence information because the game round triggered by the special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is being executed or the predetermined game state. This makes it possible to prevent the user from being unhandled.

  Feature C6. The duration of the game cycle triggered by the first special information corresponding to the grant correspondence information is a duration of the game cycle triggered by the second special information corresponding to establishment of the specific condition and the predetermined game state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the period is set to be equal to or longer than the total period of the execution period of the game machine.

  According to the feature C6, the game time triggered by the second special information corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information or the game time triggered by the first special information corresponding to the added correspondence information in a situation where the predetermined game state is being executed. Is started, the game round triggered by the first special information ends after the predetermined game state ends. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined game state and the specific game state from being executed in an overlapping manner.

  In addition, even if any one or more of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4 are applied to the features C1 to C6. Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A first effect execution in which a predetermined effect can be executed when the first profit is given in the first situation, and the predetermined effect is not executed when the first profit is not given in the first situation. Means (in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S3304 and S3306 to step S3308 in the sound-side MPU 93, and in the sixth embodiment, the function of executing the processing of steps S4009 to S4014 in the main MPU 82) When,
In the second situation, the second production execution means (in the fifth embodiment, the second production execution means for enabling the predetermined production to be executed in both the case where the first profit is provided and the case where the second profit is provided) A function of performing the processing of steps S3304 and S3305 in the sound-side MPU 93, and a function of performing the processing of steps S4004 to S4011 in the main MPU 82 in the sixth embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, when the predetermined effect occurs in the first situation, the grant of the first profit is determined, and when the predetermined effect occurs in the second situation, the first profit or the second profit is provided. . As a result, even in the same predetermined effect, the contents of the profit suggested by the predetermined effect are different between the first situation and the second situation, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the predetermined effect. Become. In addition, the player expecting the provision of the first profit is greatly satisfied with the occurrence of the predetermined effect by the occurrence of the predetermined effect in the first situation, and when the predetermined effect occurs in the second situation, This is expected to correspond to the provision of one profit. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the first profit is more advantageous to the player than the second profit.

  According to the feature D2, the player expects that the first profit is provided. In this case, by having the configuration of the above-described feature D1, the predetermined effect is generated in the first situation, and the user is greatly satisfied with the generation of the predetermined effect. It is expected that it corresponds to the grant of the first profit.

  Feature D3. A gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein a part of the situation in a specific period corresponds to the first situation, and a part of the situation in the specific period corresponds to the second situation. .

  According to the feature D3, the content of the profit suggested by the occurrence of the predetermined effect is different even within the range of the specific period. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game in the specific period.

Feature D4. A special information acquisition unit (a function of executing a process of acquiring hold information in the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition;
An assignment determining unit (a function of executing processing of steps S3105 to S3109 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment correspondence information;
Providing the player with the first profit based on the result of the assignment determination being a first correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the first information in the assignment correspondence information; Privilege granting means for granting the second profit to the player based on the result of the grant determination being a second response result that the special information corresponds to the second information of the grant correspondence information (The function of executing the processing of steps S3006 to S3008 in the main MPU 82);
The game replay operation is started, and the end of the game replay operation as a state corresponding to the determination result of the grant determination is defined as one of the game times, and the game replay operation is performed in each game time. Game time control means (a function of executing the special figure change start processing, the special figure change processing, and the special figure determination processing in the main MPU 82);
Transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S2902 and S2903 in the main MPU 82) for transitioning to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player;
Terminating means for terminating the advantageous game state after the number of executions of the game times reaches the termination reference number in the advantageous game state (a function of executing the processing of steps S3002 to S3005 in the main MPU 82);
With
The first situation is a situation where the remaining number of games required to reach the end reference number of times in the advantageous gaming state is within a predetermined number range,
The second situation is a situation where the remaining number of games required to reach the end reference number of times in the advantageous gaming state is within a specific number of times range, wherein any one of the features D1 to D3. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D4, the content of the profit suggested by the occurrence of the predetermined effect is different in relation to the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state. As a result, attention is paid to the predetermined effect in relation to the remaining number of times of the advantageous game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature D5. The first interest is more advantageous to the player than the second interest;
The first situation is a situation where the remaining number of games required to reach the end reference number of times in the advantageous game state is equal to or more than a predetermined reference number,
The gaming machine according to feature D4, wherein the second situation is a situation in which the remaining number of games required to reach the end reference number of times in the advantageous gaming state is less than a predetermined reference number of times.

  According to the feature D5, when the predetermined effect occurs in a situation where the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state is equal to or more than the predetermined reference number, the grant of the first profit is determined, and the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state is continued. Is less than the predetermined reference number, if the predetermined effect occurs, the first profit or the second profit is provided. In this case, if the predetermined effect occurs before the remaining number of times of the advantageous game state reaches the predetermined reference number, the provision of the first profit having a higher degree of advantage is determined, and the occurrence of the predetermined effect is determined. The player will be very satisfied. Further, when the predetermined effect occurs in a situation where the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state is less than the predetermined reference number, the grant of the first profit or the second profit is determined, and the player is switched to the advantageous gaming state. You will be satisfied that you have gained some benefit by the end.

Feature D6. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable ball entry means (special winning device 32) configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Opening / closing control means for executing opening / closing control for switching the variable ball input means to the closed state after switching to the closed state (a function of executing a special power starting process, a special power opening process, and a special power closing process in the main MPU 82);
With
The first profit is a profit that shifts to a first specific game state in which the opening / closing control is performed, and a game state after the end of the first specific game state becomes the advantageous game state,
The second profit is a profit that shifts to a second specific game state in which the opening / closing control is performed, and a game state after the end of the second specific game state becomes the advantageous game state,
The gaming machine according to Feature D4 or D5, wherein the number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means is greater in the first specific game state than in the second specific game state.

  According to the feature D6, even if any of the first profit and the second profit is given in the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is continued, so that the player is satisfied no matter which benefit is given. However, since the number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means is larger in the first specific game state than in the second specific game state, the player is more satisfied when the first profit is given. It will be. In this case, if the predetermined effect is generated before the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state reaches the predetermined reference number, the grant of the first profit is determined. Will be greatly satisfied. In addition, if the predetermined effect occurs in a situation where the remaining number of times of the advantageous game state is less than the predetermined reference number, the continuation of the advantageous game state is determined, and thus the occurrence of the predetermined effect is satisfied. Will be done.

Feature D7. Special information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3504 and S3509 in the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the process of step S3605 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the corresponding information;
Providing the player with the first profit based on the result of the assignment determination being a first correspondence result that the special information corresponds to the first information in the assignment correspondence information; Privilege granting means for granting the second profit to the player based on the result of the grant determination being a second response result that the special information corresponds to the second information of the grant correspondence information (The function of executing the processing of steps S3703 to S3714 in the main MPU 82);
A destination specifying unit that specifies the content of the special information acquired by the special information acquiring unit at a timing before the special information becomes a target of the assignment determination (steps S4006 and S4014 in the main MPU 82). Function to perform processing),
With
The first situation is a situation in which the special information corresponding to the first information is included in the special information to be subjected to the assignment determination before the special information to be subjected to the predetermined effect. Yes,
The second situation is a situation in which the special information corresponding to the first information is not included in the special information to be subjected to the assignment determination before the special information to be executed in the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6.

  According to the feature D7, in a case where the event in which the first profit is given does not occur in response to the special information targeted for the grant determination before the special information targeted for the execution of the predetermined effect, While the first profit or the second profit is provided in response to the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined effect, the target of the determination is given before the special information that is the execution target of the predetermined effect. If an event occurs in which the first profit is given in response to the special information that has become unnecessary, the first profit is given in response to the special information for which the predetermined effect is to be executed. Thereby, when the predetermined effect has occurred, the player is provided with the first profit triggered by the special information targeted for the determination of the provision before the special information targeted for execution of the predetermined effect. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even if an event in which the first profit is granted does not occur due to the special information targeted for the provision determination before the special information targeted for execution of the predetermined effect, the first profit or the first profit Since two profits are provided, even in this case, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the special information on which the predetermined effect is to be executed from being lowered.

Feature D8. Hold display control means (steps S3504, S3508, and step S3508 in the main MPU 82) for executing a hold display corresponding to the number of the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means and not subject to the assignment determination. S3510, a function of executing the processing of steps S3603 and S3604),
The gaming machine according to Feature D7, wherein the predetermined effect is performed by setting a mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be subjected to the predetermined effect as a special mode.

  According to the feature D8, the predetermined effect is executed by using the hold display, so that the player can clearly recognize the special information on which the predetermined effect is to be executed.

Feature D9. Launching means (playing ball launching mechanism 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a launch operation by a player;
A variable ball entry means (special winning device 32) configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state,
Opening / closing control means for executing opening / closing control for switching the variable ball input means to the closed state after switching to the closed state (a function of executing a special power starting process, a special power opening process, and a special power closing process in the main MPU 82);
With
The first profit is a profit in which a shift to a first specific game state in which the opening / closing control is performed occurs,
The second profit is a profit in which a shift to a second specific game state in which the opening / closing control is performed is generated,
The gaming machine according to feature D7 or D8, wherein the number of game balls that can enter the variable ball entry means is greater in the first specific game state than in the second specific game state.

  According to the feature D9, the first profit is more advantageous to the player than the second profit. Thereby, it is possible to make the player expect that the first profit is awarded with the special information targeted for the determination before the special information targeted for the execution of the predetermined effect. Become.

Feature D10. The assignment determination unit has at least a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability that the result of the assignment determination is the first correspondence result is relatively high and low, as a determination mode,
When the determination mode shifts from the low-probability mode to the high-probability mode, until the number of occurrences of the first specific game state reaches the specific number, at least until the result of the assignment determination becomes the first corresponding result. Becomes a continuous game state in which the high probability mode continues,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D7 to D9, wherein the first situation occurs in a state where the number of remaining occurrences of the first specific gaming state in the continuous gaming state is one. .

  According to the feature D10, it is possible to increase a player's expectation that a predetermined effect will be generated in a state where the number of remaining occurrences of the first specific gaming state in the continuous gaming state is one.

  In addition, even if any one or more of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4 are applied to the features D1 to D10. Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Special information acquisition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3504 and S3509 in the main MPU 82) for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of the acquisition condition;
An addition determining unit (a function of executing the process of step S3605 in the main MPU 82) for determining whether or not the special information corresponds to the corresponding information;
A privilege granting means (step S3703 in the main MPU 82) for granting a privilege to a player based on a result of the grant determination that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence information. To execute the process of step S3714);
When the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is acquired in a situation where the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information has already been acquired, a predetermined notification control unit (main side) configured to execute a predetermined notification. A function of executing control processing of the hold notification in the MPU 82);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, when the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information is acquired in a situation where the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information has already been acquired, the predetermined notification is executed. In this case, a situation may occur in which the privilege is given two or more times. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation that the predetermined notification is executed, and to improve the interest of the game.

  Feature E2. The predetermined notification control means executes the predetermined notification based on the fact that the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information has been acquired in a situation where the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information has not been acquired. The gaming machine according to Feature E1, further comprising means for performing a process (a function of executing the processes of Steps S4006 to S4011 in the main MPU 82).

  According to the feature E2, even if the predetermined notification is executed, the privilege may not be given due to the special information targeted for the grant determination before the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification. . Accordingly, when the predetermined notification is executed, the player expects that the notification corresponds to the grant of the privilege twice, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the situation in which the predetermined notification is executed. It becomes possible.

  Feature E3. When the predetermined notification is performed based on the new acquisition of the special information in a situation in which the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information has not been obtained, the special information that has triggered the execution of the predetermined notification is The predetermined notification is executed based on the fact that the special information is newly acquired in a situation where the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence information has already been acquired, while it may not correspond to the assignment correspondence information. If so, the special information that has triggered the execution of the predetermined notification corresponds to the additional information, and the gaming machine according to the features E1 or E2.

  According to the feature E3, although it is not determined that the privilege is given by the special information that is the trigger of the execution of the predetermined notification simply by executing the predetermined notification, the predetermined notification is not executed in a situation where the predetermined notification is executed. In the case where a privilege is granted by using the special information targeted for the grant before the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification, the benefit is also granted to the special information that has triggered the execution of the predetermined notification. Will occur. As a result, when the predetermined notification is started, the player expects that the privilege will be given by the special information targeted for the grant determination before the special information that triggered the execution of the predetermined notification. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Feature E4. Hold display control means (steps S3504, S3508, and step S3508 in the main MPU 82) for executing a hold display corresponding to the number of the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means and not subject to the assignment determination. S3510, a function of executing the processing of steps S3603 and S3604),
The game according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the predetermined notification is performed by setting a mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be subjected to the predetermined notification as a special mode. Machine.

  According to the feature E4, the predetermined notification is executed using the hold display, so that it is possible for the player to clearly recognize the special information to be subjected to the predetermined notification.

  In addition, even if any one or more of the features A1 to A9, the features B1 to B14, the features C1 to C6, the features D1 to D10, and the features E1 to E4 are applied to the features E1 to E4. Good. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  According to the invention relating to the feature A group, the feature B group, the feature C group, the feature D group, and the feature E group, the following problems can be solved.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  For the pachinko machine, specifically, a configuration in which a special game state is entered when a winning result is obtained by an internal lottery based on a game ball entering the ball entry section provided in the game area, or a predetermined ball entry A configuration is known in which a special game state is entered when a game ball enters the club. Then, in the case of transition to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entry device provided in the game area is started, and game balls are paid out based on the ball entry into the ball entry device.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  Reference numeral 10: Pachinko machine, 27: Game ball launching mechanism, 32: Special power winning device, 33: First operating port, 34: Second operating port, 82: Main MPU, 83: Main ROM, 84: Main RAM, 93: MPU on the sound light side, 103: MPU on the display side.

Claims (1)

A first effect execution in which a predetermined effect can be executed when the first profit is given in the first situation, and the predetermined effect is not executed when the first profit is not given in the first situation. Means,
In the second situation, the second effect execution means for enabling the predetermined effect to be executed in both the case where the first profit is provided and the case where the second profit is provided,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

Images